Introduction - Service Express

Introduction - Service Express
11/01/14 17:53:13 31TK4630_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2012 Acura TL was a wise investment. It
will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in
the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Navigation Key
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Chapter Table of Contents
Index
Book Table of Contents
i
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:53:23 31TK4630_003
Introduction
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the
permission of the vehicle owner.
ii
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:53:27 31TK4630_004
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials − special
handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
iii
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:53:41 31TK4630_005
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iv
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:53:54 31TK4630_006
Navigation Key
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Chapter Table of Contents
2012 TL Online Reference Owner's Model
Contents
Index
Book Table of Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 61
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items)............... 225
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 467
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 485
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 529
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 581
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 611
Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ........................ 629
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 633
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures)
1
00X31-TK4-6310
© 2011 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:54:17 31TK4630_007
Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
the multi-information display, and
how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
Maintenance
The Maintenance MinderTM shows
you when you need to take your
vehicle to the dealer for maintenance
service. There is also a list of things
to check and instructions on how to
check them.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
2
2012 TL
HOME
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Client Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
11/01/14 17:54:25 31TK4630_008
Your Vehicle at a Glance
HOMELINK BUTTONS
(P. 404)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P. 210)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 145)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (BSI) ALERT
INDICATOR* (P. 522)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 9, 26)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P. 168)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR*
(P. 522)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS (P. 170)
AUDIO (P. 235)
CLOCK (P. 391)
COMPASS* (P. 397)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH (P. 152)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 226)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES (P. 206)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (P. 494)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (P. 491)
TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 154)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 470)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P. 215)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE (P. 472)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P. 9, 26)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 63)
GAUGES (P. 76)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 78)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK (P. 389)
A/T model with navigation system is shown.
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P. 215)
USB ADAPTER CABLE
(P. 266, 275, 356, 367)
* : If equipped
3
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:54:36 31TK4630_009
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS (P. 139, 143)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS (P. 137)
PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P. 499)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P. 143)
*2
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P. 34)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P. 145)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON (P. 145/169)
ENGINE START/
STOP BUTTON
(P. 184)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS
(P. 387)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH (P. 511)
BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION
SYSTEM (BSI) OFF
BUTTON*2 (P. 525)
HEADLIGHT WASHER
BUTTON*2 (P. 138)
KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTE SLOT
(P. 197)
*4
PHONE BUTTON*2 (P. 424)
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P. 407)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS(P. 146)
A/T model is shown.
* 1:
* 2:
* 3:
* 4:
INTERFACE DIAL*3 (P. 285)
SELECTOR KNOB*2 (P. 236)
HORN*1
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS for
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*3/
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM (P. 425)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 202)
SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS*2 (P. 204)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 401)
IGNITION SWITCH (P. 151)
: Models with keyless access
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS (P. 79)
system
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
Refer to the navigation system owner’s manual.
Switch location varies on models.
4
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:54:41 31TK4630_010
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 16
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 20
Seat Belt System Components ... 20
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 22
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 24
Airbag System Components ....... 24
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 32
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 33
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
Airbag Service .............................. 35
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 37
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 37
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 38
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 38
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 40
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 40
Additional Safety Precautions .... 40
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 42
Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
With LATCH ................................ 47
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
With a Tether ............................... 51
Protecting Larger Children ............ 53
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 53
Using a Booster Seat ................... 54
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 55
Additional Safety Precautions .... 56
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Safety Labels .................................... 58
5
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
11/01/14 17:54:56 31TK4630_011
Important Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 16 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 37 − 56 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
6
2012 TL
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 531 ).
11/01/14 17:55:05 31TK4630_012
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(8) (6) (9)
(12) (3)
(9)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
(12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensors
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
7
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
(10)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
11/01/14 17:55:20 31TK4630_013
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts
− side impacts
− rear impacts
− rollovers
8
2012 TL
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
11/01/14 17:55:30 31TK4630_014
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 30 for more
information on how your side
airbags work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
32 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
26 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
11/01/14 17:55:39 31TK4630_015
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
2012 TL
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember however, that no safety
system can prevent all injures or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
11/01/14 17:55:51 31TK4630_016
Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 37 − 56 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children,
and larger children who ride in
your vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch* to the ON
(II) position, and each time you open
any door or the trunk with the key in
the ON (II) position.
Your vehicle has a door/
trunk open indicator (red)
on the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the trunk lid is not
tightly closed.
See page 152 for how to lock the
doors, and page 71 for how the door/
trunk open indicator works.
Your vehicle also has a door and
trunk open indicator on the multiinformation display to indicate
when a specific door or the trunk
is not tightly closed. You will see
the appropriate indicator(s) for
each condition.
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front seat.
11/01/14 17:56:01 31TK4630_017
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
If any door or the trunk is not closed
tightly, the multi-information display
reminds you to close the open
door(s) or the trunk before you start
driving.
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator will
come on.
When one or more doors or the
trunk lid are not tightly closed, the
corresponding indicator for each
condition will come on.
The above example shows the front
right and rear left doors, and the
trunk open.
The above illustration shows that all
doors and the trunk are open.
12
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:56:12 31TK4630_018
Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Locking the doors also helps
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 125 .
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 146 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
CONTINUED
13
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
11/01/14 17:56:20 31TK4630_019
Protecting Adults and Teens
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Driver and Passenger Safety
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
See page 161 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their
seat- back to a comfortable,
upright position.
14
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:56:30 31TK4630_020
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
See page 161 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint
so the center of the back of your
head rests against the center of
the restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
CONTINUED
15
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
11/01/14 17:56:37 31TK4630_021
Protecting Adults and Teens
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
Driver and Passenger Safety
See page 163 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
16
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:56:47 31TK4630_022
Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTON
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
The front seats have adjustable
seat belt anchors. To adjust the
height of an anchor, press and
hold the release button and slide
the anchor up or down as needed
(it has four positions).
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 20 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
17
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
11/01/14 17:56:57 31TK4630_023
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
18
2012 TL
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
11/01/14 17:57:08 31TK4630_024
Protecting Adults and Teens
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup,
ask your doctor if it’s okay for
you to drive.
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your airbags inflate.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
19
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
11/01/14 17:57:19 31TK4630_025
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch*
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch* is turned to the ON
(II) position.
20
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 17:57:32 31TK4630_026
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 16 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After
exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt
is out of the way and will not get
closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 49 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
CONTINUED
21
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
11/01/14 17:57:41 31TK4630_027
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS
indicator comes on and the tensioner
must be replaced.
Allowing a child to play with a
seat belt or wrap one around
their neck can result in serious
injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with
any seat belt and make sure
any unused seat belt a child
can reach is buckled, fully
retracted, and locked.
The tensioners can be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
22
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:57:49 31TK4630_028
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
564 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly
will not provide good protection
and should be replaced as soon
as possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
you should have your dealer inspect
the belt, and replace it if necessary.
A belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Acura provides a limited warranty on
seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.
23
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:57:57 31TK4630_029
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
Driver and Passenger Safety
(15)
(9)
(3)
(8) (2)
(7) (12)
(11)
(5)
(1)
(4)
(8)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(5)
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
ODS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
(16) Safing Sensor
(14)
(10)
(13)
(4)
(14)
(13)
24
2012 TL
(16)
11/01/14 17:58:09 31TK4630_030
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 30 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 31 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 20 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see
page 29 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 29 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see
page 32 ).
CONTINUED
25
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 22 ).
11/01/14 17:58:21 31TK4630_031
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch* is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbag system
components (see page 32 ).
How Your Front Airbags Work
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 33 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 34 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision,
sensors will detect the
vehicle’s rapid deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
26
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 17:58:32 31TK4630_032
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory
problems may experience some
temporary discomfort. If
this occurs, get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 34 ).
CONTINUED
27
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
11/01/21 15:47:48 31TK4630_033
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold
Front Airbags (SRS)
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle is equipped with dualstage, multiple-threshold front
airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
severe enough to cause one or both
front airbags to deploy, the airbags
can inflate at different rates,
depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
chest injuries in frontal crashes.
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Objects placed or pushed under
the front passenger’s seat may
cause the sensor to malfunction,
increasing the risk of injury in a
crash.
28
2012 TL
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
11/01/14 17:58:50 31TK4630_034
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
DRIVER’S SEAT
POSITION SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Acura does
not encourage carrying an infant or
small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
kg), the system will automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
CONTINUED
29
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 34 ).
11/01/14 17:59:00 31TK4630_035
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
Driver and Passenger Safety
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against cargo on the
seat or floor behind it.
Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Also, make sure the floor mat
behind the front passenger’s seat
is hooked to the floor mat anchor
(see page 565 ). If it is not, the mat
may interfere with the proper
operation of the sensors and
operation of the seat.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
30
2012 TL
11/01/14 17:59:11 31TK4630_036
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front
passenger’s seat.
Although Acura does not
encourage children to ride in front,
if the position sensors detect a
child has leaned into the side
airbag’s deployment path, the
airbag will shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 33 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
31
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
11/01/14 17:59:22 31TK4630_037
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your
Side Curtain Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How the SRS Indicator
Works
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbag
system components.
When you turn the ignition switch*
to the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid
acceleration and signal the control
unit to instantly inflate the side
curtain airbag.
32
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 17:59:37 31TK4630_038
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position or
on models with keyless access
system, press the engine start/
stop button to set ON mode (see
page 187 ).
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbag system components
may not work properly when you
need them.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
U.S.
Canada
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch*
to the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
out (see page 67 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display.
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
11/01/14 17:59:46 31TK4630_039
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
Driver and Passenger Safety
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
U.S. Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
34
2012 TL
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
11/01/14 17:59:59 31TK4630_040
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
We recommend against the use of
salvaged airbag system
components, including the airbag,
tensioners, sensors, and control
unit.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
35
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
11/01/14 18:00:06 31TK4630_041
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
Driver and Passenger Safety
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Relations. In the US, call
800-382-2238, and in Canada, call
888-9-ACURA-9.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
36
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:00:16 31TK4630_042
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need
to drive with a child in your vehicle,
be sure to read this section. It
begins with important general
guidelines, then presents special
information for infants, small
children, and larger children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properly restrained when they ride in
a vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 42 − 52 ).
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 53 − 56 ).
37
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, traffic
collisions are the number one
cause of death of children age 12
and under.
11/01/14 18:00:30 31TK4630_043
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to crash statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page 34 ), please
follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or very seriously injure
an infant.
38
2012 TL
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 53 for important
information about protecting
larger children).
11/01/14 18:00:46 31TK4630_044
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
U.S. Models
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
Driver and Passenger Safety
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
39
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:01:02 31TK4630_045
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group
of children, and a child must ride
in front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 53 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 161 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see
page 16 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch
the child, or because the child
requires attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in
a crash.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 153 ).
40
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:01:11 31TK4630_046
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 50 and 51 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch or with the keyless
access remote in the vehicle can
accidentally set the vehicle in
motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use. Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 156 ).
Driver and Passenger Safety
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters or keyless access
remotes out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch*, and open the trunk,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
*: On models with keyless access system
Your vehicle has the engine start/stop
button instead of an ignition switch.
For more information on how to select
the power mode, see page 184 .
2012 TL
41
11/01/14 18:01:23 31TK4630_047
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
42
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:01:33 31TK4630_048
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height
CONTINUED
43
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
11/01/14 18:01:41 31TK4630_049
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement
Driver and Passenger Safety
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 34 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
44
2012 TL
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
11/01/14 18:01:50 31TK4630_050
Selecting a Child Seat
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using the seat belt and a top tether
for added security. This is because
all child seats are required to be
designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt.
In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat
belt be used to attach a LATCHcompatible seat once a child reaches
a specified weight. Please read the
child seat owner’s manual for proper
installation instructions.
Important considerations when
selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the
following three requirements:
The child seat is the correct type
and size for the child.
The child seat is the correct type
for the seating position.
The child seat is compliant with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
45
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Most child seats are LATCHcompatible (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren). Some have a
rigid-type connector, while others
have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some
existing and previously owned child
seats can only be installed using the
seat belt. Whichever type you
choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care
instructions as well as the
instructions in this manual. Proper
installation is key to maximizing your
child’s safety.
11/01/14 18:01:59 31TK4630_051
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
46
2012 TL
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
11/01/14 18:02:11 31TK4630_052
Installing a Child Seat
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
COVERS
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.
STRAPS
Outer seating position
2. Use the pull strap to lower the
anchor cover on the lower seat
cushion that covers the LATCH
anchor holes in the seat.
3. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
47
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:02:21 31TK4630_053
Installing a Child Seat
HEAD RESTRAINT
Driver and Passenger Safety
BUTTON
Outer seating position
4. Push the button located next to
each rear head restraint to pivot
the head restraint down.
Rigid type
Flexible type
5. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
48
2012 TL
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
6. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
11/01/14 18:02:32 31TK4630_054
Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP HOOK
COVER
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
7. Route the tether strap over the
head restraint, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
8. Tighten the tether strap as
instructed by the child seat maker.
9. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
CONTINUED
49
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
ANCHOR
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
11/01/14 18:02:41 31TK4630_055
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
50
2012 TL
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
11/01/14 18:02:52 31TK4630_056
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
a Tether
Using an Outer Anchor
TETHER STRAP HOOK
COVER
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
Driver and Passenger Safety
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
COVER
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
1. After properly securing the child
seat with the lap/shoulder belt
(see page 49 ), pivot the head
restraint down (see page 163 ) and
route the tether strap over the
head restraint.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required
or available.
CONTINUED
51
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:02:59 31TK4630_057
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Using the Center Anchor
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
COVER
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 49 ), adjust the
head restraint to its lowest
position, then route the tether
strap over the head restraint.
2. Follow steps 2 and 3 in the
previous column.
52
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:03:09 31TK4630_058
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
53
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:03:19 31TK4630_059
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states, provinces or
territories where you intend to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
45 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
54
2012 TL
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
11/01/14 18:03:30 31TK4630_060
Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 16 and 53 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body
is in the path of a deploying side
airbag, the child could receive
possibly serious injuries.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout the ride.
CONTINUED
55
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
11/01/14 18:03:41 31TK4630_061
Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
56
2012 TL
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
11/01/14 18:03:51 31TK4630_062
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that
may have damaged the underside.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk lid open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows,
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
57
2012 TL
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
11/01/14 18:04:02 31TK4630_063
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
RADIATOR CAP
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
58
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:04:21 31TK4630_064
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR
U.S. models
Driver and Passenger Safety
DOORJAMB
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian models
59
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:04:23 31TK4630_065
60
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:04:29 31TK4630_066
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Remote Transmitter ...................... 157
Seats ................................................ 161
Trunk Pass-through Cover ....... 166
Mirrors ............................................ 167
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 170
Keyless Access System................. 173
Keyless Access Remote ............ 179
Engine Start/Stop Button ......... 183
Seat Heaters ................................... 202
Seat Heaters and Ventilations ...... 204
Power Windows ............................. 206
Moonroof ........................................ 210
Parking Brake ................................ 212
Interior Convenience Items .......... 213
Beverage Holders ...................... 214
Accessory Power Sockets......... 215
Glove Box ................................... 216
Console Compartment .............. 216
Vanity Mirror ............................. 217
Sun Visor .................................... 217
Center Pocket ............................ 218
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 218
Coat Hook ................................... 219
Interior Lights ................................ 220
61
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 62
Instrument Panel ............................. 63
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 64
Gauges .............................................. 76
Fuel Gauge ................................... 76
Temperature Gauge .................... 77
Multi-Information Display .............. 78
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 136
Windshield Wipers and
Washers ...................................... 137
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 139
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature .................................... 141
Daytime Running Lights .......... 142
Fog Lights ...................................... 143
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 143
Hazard Warning Button ................ 145
Rear Window Defogger ................ 145
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 146
Keys and Locks.............................. 147
Immobilizer System....................... 149
Ignition Switch ............................... 151
Door Locks ..................................... 152
Childproof Door Locks ............. 153
Trunk............................................... 154
Emergency Trunk Opener ....... 156
11/01/14 18:04:37 31TK4630_067
Control Locations
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM
(BSI) ALERT INDICATOR*
(P. 522)
HOMELINK
BUTTONS
(P. 404)
MOONROOF
SWITCH
(P. 210)
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS(P. 63)
GAUGES (P. 76)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 78)
Instruments and Controls
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 168)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 145)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS (P. 170)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR*
(P. 522)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P. 152)
AUDIO (P. 235)
CLOCK (P. 391)
COMPASS* (P. 397)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES (P. 206)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 226)
TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 154)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (P. 494)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (P. 491)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 470)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 472)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 202)
SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS*
USB ADAPTER CABLE
(P. 204)
(P. 266, 275, 356, 367)
A/T model with navigation system is shown.
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P. 215)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P. 215)
*: If equipped
62
2012 TL
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P. 389)
11/01/14 18:04:48 31TK4630_068
Instrument Panel
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P. 64)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 65, 596)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 78)
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P. 72)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 72)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR (P. 66)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 67)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P. 71)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P. 64, 597)
DOOR/TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 71)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR (P. 70)
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR* (P. 74)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 65)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
INDICATOR (P. 68)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 65, 598)
SH-AWD INDICATOR* (P. 73)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P. 73)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 68)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 67)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P. 72)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P. 71)
*: If equipped
A/T model is shown.
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 71)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM
(BSI) INDICATOR* (P. 75)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P. 72)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR
(P. 69)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
63
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P. 64, 595)
11/01/14 18:05:02 31TK4630_069
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch* to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch* is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals, and you
will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or
‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 20 .
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 597 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running, and you
will see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL
LEVEL’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 595 .
If you turn the ignition switch* to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
64
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:05:16 31TK4630_070
Instrument Panel Indicators
Charging System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
2. This indicator also comes on when
the battery needs to be replaced
along with a ‘‘REPLACE
BATTERY’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 596 .
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
U.S.
Canada
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the brakes
and tires.
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 212 ).
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
65
Instruments and Controls
1. If it comes on when the engine is
running, the battery is not being
charged, and you will see a
‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display.
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch* to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key, on models with keyless
access system, if an appropriate
keyless access remote is used. If it is
not a properly coded key or keyless
access remote, the indicator will
blink, and the engine’s fuel system
will be disabled (see page 149 ).
11/01/14 18:05:24 31TK4630_071
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
system. You will also see a ‘‘LOW
BRAKE FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK
BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 598 .
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on at any
other time, there is a problem in the
ABS. If this happens, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 508 .
66
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/stop
button instead of an ignition switch. ON
Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and
START Mode is the equivalent of
START (III). For more information, see
pages 187 and 184 .
11/01/14 18:05:34 31TK4630_072
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch* to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 33 .
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch* to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
airbag system components. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 32 .
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display.
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
67
11/01/14 18:05:48 31TK4630_073
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position.
If the VSA indicator illuminates,
hill start assist will not be working.
Without hill start assist, the
vehicle will roll downhill
immediately when you release the
brake on an incline.
VSA OFF Indicator
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you have turned off
the vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 510 .
This indicator has two functions:
1. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 510 ).
2. If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA or Hill Start Assist (on
SH-AWD models only) system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ or ‘‘CHECK HILL
START ASSIST SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked. Without
VSA, your vehicle still has normal
driving ability, but will not have
VSA traction and stability
enhancement. For more
information, see page 510 .
68
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/stop
button instead of an ignition switch. ON
Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and
START Mode is the equivalent of
START (III). For more information, see
pages 187 and 184 .
11/01/14 18:06:00 31TK4630_074
Instrument Panel Indicators
This indicator has two functions:
1. If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 516 ).
Check the tire pressure monitor on
the multi-information display and
determine the cause (see page 515 ).
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multiinformation display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 583 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service.
For more information, see page 607 .
2012 TL
2. If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see
page 514 .
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
69
Instruments and Controls
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position.
11/01/14 18:06:11 31TK4630_075
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 558 and 562 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch* to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will stay on,
but should go off after driving a
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.
70
2012 TL
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering in order to prevent damage
to the steering system caused by
overheating. This may also happen if
you hold the steering wheel on the
full left or right position for a while.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:06:24 31TK4630_076
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of
LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 140 .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 142 ).
Door/Trunk Open
Indicator
This indicator comes on red if
andy door or the trunk lid is not
closed tightly.
You will also see a corresponding
indicator(s) on the multi-information
display to indicate which door and/
or the trunk is not closed tightly (see
page 12 ).
Fog Light Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 143 .
71
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch* to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position, without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. Reminder
beeps will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
High Beam Indicator
11/01/14 18:06:37 31TK4630_077
Instrument Panel Indicators
Cruise Main Indicator
Instruments and Controls
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 401 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
401 for information on operating the
cruise control.
System Message
Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 79 ) to see the message (see
page 90 ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
Security System Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page 395 .
72
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:06:48 31TK4630_078
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel Indicator
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) on
SH-AWD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal
(10.5 ) on 2WD models of fuel
remaining in the tank.
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘LOW FUEL’’ message on the multiinformation display.
On SH-AWD models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the SH-AWD system. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 505 ). Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
For more information, see page 504 .
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
73
Instruments and Controls
When the needle reaches E, there
is a very small amount of fuel in
the tank.
Super Handling-All
Wheel Drive (SH-AWD)
Indicator
11/01/14 18:06:59 31TK4630_079
Instrument Panel Indicators
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the differential temperature is
too high.
Instruments and Controls
You will also see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page 505 ).
Pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.
Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
Keyless Access System
Indicator
On models with keyless access system
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you select the
ON mode with the engine start/stop
button (see page 195 ). If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates that
there is a problem with the system.
This indicator has two functions:
1. If this indicator comes on along
with a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display,
there is a problem with the keyless
access system. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible. For more information,
see page 196 .
74
2012 TL
2. If this indicator comes on along
with a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
STARTING SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display,
there is a problem with the keyless
starting system. In this case, your
vehicle may not restart. If you can
continue to drive safely, take the
vehicle to your dealer and have it
checked as soon as possible. For
more information, see page 196 .
11/01/14 18:07:08 31TK4630_080
Instrument Panel Indicators
Blind Spot Information
System (BSI) Indicator
On models with blind spot information
system (BSI)
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you have
turned off the blind spot
information system (BSI).
Instruments and Controls
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you select the
ON mode by operating the engine
start/stop button (see page 185 ).
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
BSI. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
BLIND SPOT SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display. If
this happens, take your vehicle to a
dealer, and have it checked. For
more information, see page 519 .
When this indicator is on,
BSI is not working.
When you turn the system on, the
indicator will turn off.
The BSI indicator also comes on if
the rear bumper becomes dirty while
driving. You will see a ‘‘BLIND
SPOT NOT AVAILABLE’’ message
on the multi-information display.
When you clean the rear bumper,
the indicator should go off after you
begin driving again.
75
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:07:15 31TK4630_081
Gauges
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Instruments and Controls
TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
SPEEDOMETER
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
The needle returns to the
bottom after you turn off the
ignition/power mode.
FUEL GAUGE
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model with automatic transmission is shown.
76
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:07:23 31TK4630_082
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. Turn to page 593 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine cooling system.
If the pointer of the temperature
gauge reaches to or above the red
mark, you will also see the ‘‘WATER
TEMP HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display. This will alert
you that the engine should be
cooled down.
77
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:07:33 31TK4630_083
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch* is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
There are three types of messages:
normal display messages, engine oil
life and maintenance messages, and
system messages.
Normal Display Messages
Remote transmitter/keyless
access remote 1 is used.
You can select the displayed
language and also customize some
vehicle control settings to your liking
with the multi-information display
and the three buttons on the steering
wheel (see page 79 ).
Remote transmitter/keyless
access remote 2 is used.
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door, the display shows
‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’
depending on which remote
transmitter/keyless access remote
you use, and the driver’s seat and the
outside mirrors move to the position
stored in that remote transmitter/
keyless access remote (see
page 170 ).
On models with keyless access system
78
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
The driver’s ID (1 or 2) is displayed
when the power mode is set to ON.
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:07:44 31TK4630_084
Multi-Information Display
On models with keyless access system
These messages go off after several
seconds.
SEL/RESET BUTTON
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display when you turn
the ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position.
With the ignition switch* in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown on page
81 each time you press the INFO
(▲/▼) button or the SEL/RESET
button.
These messages go off several
seconds after the key is inserted into
the ignition switch.
When you turn the ignition switch*
to the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
79
Instruments and Controls
INFO BUTTONS (▲/▼)
A/T model is shown.
11/01/14 18:07:53 31TK4630_085
Multi-Information Display
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page 89 ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page 94 ).
UPPER
SEGMENT
Instruments and Controls
U.S. model is shown.
LOWER
SEGMENT
The multi-information display
consists of an upper segment and a
lower segment.
80
2012 TL
In the normal display mode, the
upper segment displays trip
computer information, such as fuel
economy or average speed. The
lower segment displays the
odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside
temperature, and engine oil life and
maintenance item code(s).
On models with keyless access system
You will see some keyless access
system messages until you select the
ON mode by operating the engine
start/stop button. These messages
can be customized (see page 110 ).
11/01/14 18:08:00 31TK4630_086
Multi-Information Display
Trip Computer (See page 83)
Instruments and Controls
HFL*1
(See page 88)
Customized Settings
(See page 94)
Tire Pressure for
Each Tire
(See page 86)
SH-AWD Torque
Distribution Monitor*2
(See page 86)
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
*1: On models without navigation system only
This display will be shown when the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.
*2: S H-AW D m odels only
U.S. model is shown.
CONTINUED
81
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:08:09 31TK4630_087
Multi-Information Display
Odometer
U.S.
Canada
Instruments and Controls
ODOMETER
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
U.S. model is shown.
With the ignition switch* in the ON
(II) position, the lower part of the
multi-information display changes as
shown in the illustration, each time
you press the SEL/RESET button.
82
2012 TL
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:08:23 31TK4630_088
Multi-Information Display
Trip Meter
U.S.
Canada
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Instruments and Controls
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset when you refuel your vehicle
(see page 105 ).
Trip Computer
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets
to ‘‘0.0.’’
CONTINUED
83
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:08:38 31TK4630_089
Multi-Information Display
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY A
INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.
models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km
(Canadian models)
This shows your instant fuel
economy.
ELAPSED TIME
Instruments and Controls
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
When you turn the ignition switch*
to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
RANGE
INSTANT FUEL
U.S. model is shown.
Average Fuel Economy A/B
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset conditions on the multiinformation display (see page 106 ).
AVG. SPEED
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
You can customize the Trip A and
Average Fuel Economy A reset
condition on the multi-information
display (see page 105 ).
84
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:08:49 31TK4630_090
Multi-Information Display
Outside Temperature
U.S.
Canada
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
Engine Oil Life
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the remaining engine oil
life. It shows 100% after the engine
oil is replaced and the display is reset.
The engine oil life is calculated
based on engine operating conditions.
For more information, see page 531 .
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 104 ).
ENGINE OIL LIFE
U.S. model is shown.
85
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
11/01/14 18:08:58 31TK4630_091
Multi-Information Display
Tire Pressure Monitor
SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor
Instruments and Controls
U.S.
Canada
Example: Technology Package is
shown.
Example: Technology Package is
shown.
SH-AWD models only
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 515 .
U.S. model is shown.
This monitor shows how much
torque is being delivered to each
wheel. For more information, see
page 504 .
86
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:09:06 31TK4630_092
Multi-Information Display
Depending on how low the battery’s
state of charge dropped and how
long it remained low, these
messages may occur frequently. It
may take a number of trips to
sufficiently recharge the battery and
the messages to no longer appear.
IGN ON (II)* − Immediately turn
off all electrical devices (interior
lights, air conditioning, audio, heated
seats, etc.). Try not to operate other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Driving the
vehicle will recharge the battery. If
the message continues to display
while driving, see your dealer.
IGN ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)*
− Follow the message and turn off
all electrical devices. Driving the
vehicle will recharge the battery,
however the vehicle may not start. If
it does not start, see jump starting
(see page 591 ), or contact your
dealer.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button instead of
an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode
is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode
is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON
Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
2012 TL
87
Instruments and Controls
Battery Charge Low
When the battery’s state of charge is
low, the vehicle’s battery
management system triggers one of
the following ‘‘BATTERY CHARGE
LOW’’ messages if the ignition
switch/power mode is on or off.
11/01/14 18:09:16 31TK4630_093
Multi-Information Display
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Instruments and Controls
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
412 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the acura.com/handsfreelink
website.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca ,
or call (888) 528-7876.
U.S. model is shown.
On models without navigation system
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL) system without touching your
cell phone.
88
2012 TL
On models with navigation system
You can see HFL information on the
navigation screen (see page 427 ).
11/01/14 18:09:27 31TK4630_094
Multi-Information Display
System Messages
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
A/T model is shown.
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
normal display returns. If there are
several system messages to be
shown, the display switches these
messages every 5 seconds.
To switch the message(s) before 5
seconds have elapsed, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering
wheel.
Even if you press the INFO (▲/▼)
button, some messages stay on or
come on again at regular intervals
until the problem is corrected.
If the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel,
you can see the corresponding
message(s) again by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
On the next page is a list of all
messages:
CONTINUED
89
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
11/01/14 18:09:43 31TK4630_095
Multi-Information Display
See page
12
U.S.
See page
596
See page
212
Canada
Instruments and Controls
See page
20
See page
20
See page
597
U.S.
See page
595
See page
553
Canada
See page
33
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
See page
508
See page
33
See page
510
See page
598
Canada
See page
510
SH-AWD model only
90
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:10:02 31TK4630_096
Multi-Information Display
See page
516
See page
87
See page
516
U.S. model shown
On models without
keyless access
system
See page 488
On models with
keyless access
system
See page 490
A/T model
See page
596
See page
517
See page
577
See page
517
See page
70
See page
77
See pages
75 and 526
See page
142
See pages
75 and 526
See page
494
U.S. model shown
U.S.
Canada
See page
515
CONTINUED
91
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
See page
87
11/01/14 18:10:17 31TK4630_097
Multi-Information Display
See page
471
See page
73
On models with keyless access
system
See page
196
Instruments and Controls
See page
548
See page
505
SH-AWD model only
See page
196
Canadian models only
See page
505
See page
151
SH-AWD model only
See page
532
See page
193
On models without
keyless access system
See page
194
See page
533
See page
198
See page
534
92
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:10:29 31TK4630_098
Multi-Information Display
See page
189
See page
199
See page
188
See page
188
See page
191
Instruments and Controls
See page
200
A/T model only
A/T model only
See page
190
A/T model only
See page
191
See page
188
M/T model only
93
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:10:38 31TK4630_099
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
Customized Settings
You can customize some vehicle
control settings. To change the
settings, the ignition switch* must be
in the ON (II) position, and the
vehicle must be stopped with the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
with the parking brake set (manual).
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button instead of
an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode
is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode
is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON
Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
If you turn the ignition switch* to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, move the shift lever out of
Park (automatic) or release the
parking brake (manual), the display
will change to the normal screen.
If you try to enter the customizing
mode while the vehicle is moving,
you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND
SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE
SETTINGS’’ (automatic) or ‘‘MUST
STOP AND SET PARK BRAKE
TO CHANGE SETTINGS’’
(manual) message and you cannot
change the settings.
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure the driver’s door is
unlocked with a corresponding
remote transmitter/
keyless access remote.
94
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:10:46 31TK4630_100
Multi-Information Display
On models without keyless access
system
DRIVER’S ID
Press the SEL/RESET
button.
U.S. model is shown.
To enter the customizing mode,
press either INFO button (▲/▼)
repeatedly until ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
SETTINGS’’ is displayed, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
customize.
CONTINUED
95
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
If you use the key to unlock the
driver’s door, the system cannot
recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
‘‘DRIVER 2.’’
11/01/21 15:47:54 31TK4630_101
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P.101)
Instruments and Controls
POSITION SETUP
(P.112)
Menu Item
LANGUAGE SELECTION
Description
Changes the language used in the display.
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
TRIP A RESET
WITH REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME
RESET
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy
to reset when you refuel.
Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.
ADJUST
ALARM VOLUME
Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three
levels.
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.
KEYLESS START
GUIDANCE SCREENS*2
MEMORY POSITION LINK
Changes the display of the keyless start guidance
screens.
Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirror
positions to a stored setting.
*1 : Default setting
*2 : Only on models with keyless access system
96
2012 TL
Setting Option
ENGLISH*1
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F ∼ ±0°F*1 ∼ 5°F
(U.S.)
−3°C ∼ ±0°C*1 ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
ON
OFF*1
IGN OFF*1
TRIP A
TRIP B
HIGH
MID*1
LOW
LOW
MAX
MIN
HIGH
OFF
MID*1
ON*1
OFF
ON*1
OFF
Page
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
113
11/01/14 18:11:03 31TK4630_102
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP*2
(P.115)
Menu Item
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.120)
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT
AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
Setting Option
DRIVER DOOR *1
ALL DOORS
ON*1
OFF
ON*1
OFF
15 sec
30 sec*1
60 sec
30 sec
15 sec*1
MAX
HIGH
MID*1
Page
116
117
118
60 sec
121
0 sec
122
LOW
MIN
123
*1: Default setting
*2: Only on models with keyless access system
CONTINUED
97
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
Description
Changes which doors unlock when you use the
remote or grab the driver’s door handle.
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the
sensor/pushing the button on the driver’s door
handle.
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/
pushing the button on the driver’s door handle.
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors.
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
11/01/14 18:11:11 31TK4630_103
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
DOOR SETUP
(P.125)
Menu Item
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
Instruments and Controls
KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
DEFAULT ALL
(P.134)
Description
Changes when the doors automatically lock.
Changes when the doors automatically unlock.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter/keyless access remote on the first
push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
*1 : Default setting
*2 : Default setting for automatic transmission
*3 : Default setting for manual transmission
98
2012 TL
Setting Option
OFF
WITH VEH SPD*1
SHIFT FROM P (A/T only)
OFF
DRIVER DOOR
With SHIFT to P*2 (A/T only)
ALL DOORS With
SHIFT to P (A/T only)
DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFF
ALL DOORS With IGN OFF
DRIVER DOOR *1
ALL DOORS
ON*1
OFF
30 sec*1
60 sec
90 sec
CANCEL
SET
Page
127
128
130
131
133
134
11/01/14 18:11:25 31TK4630_104
Multi-Information Display
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
If you do not make any changes,
select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns to
the normal display.
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP*
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR SETUP
* : Only on models with keyless access system
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select
CHANGE SETTINGS, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 134 .
CONTINUED
99
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Customize Settings
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
11/01/14 18:11:31 31TK4630_105
Multi-Information Display
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
Instruments and Controls
* : On models with keyless access
system only
DEFAULT ALL
See page 134.
METER SETUP
See page 101.
POSITION
SETUP
See page 112.
KEYLESS
ACCESS SETUP*
See page 115.
LIGHTING
SETUP
See page 120.
100
2012 TL
DOOR SETUP
See page 125.
11/01/14 18:11:44 31TK4630_106
Multi-Information Display
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
On models with keyless access
system
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE
SCREENS
CONTINUED
101
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Meter Setup
Here are the selectable custom
settings for the meter setup:
11/01/14 18:11:49 31TK4630_107
Multi-Information Display
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
Instruments and Controls
See page 103.
See page 104.
See page 105.
See page 106.
See page 108.
See page 109. On models with
keyless access
system only
See page 110.
102
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:12:00 31TK4630_108
Multi-Information Display
Language Selection
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
103
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
11/01/14 18:12:13 31TK4630_109
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
U.S. models
Instruments and Controls
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Canadian models
The displayed number is the current
adjustment above or below the
outside temperature.
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the setting.
104
2012 TL
U.S. models
Canadian models
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
11/01/14 18:12:24 31TK4630_110
Multi-Information Display
Trip A Reset With Refuel
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A RESET WITH REFUEL’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
105
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
To cause Trip A and average fuel for
trip A to reset every time you refuel
your vehicle, follow these
instructions:
11/01/14 18:12:35 31TK4630_111
Multi-Information Display
Elapsed Time Reset
There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
Instruments and Controls
IGN OFF − The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch* to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip B is reset.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
* : Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
For more information, see pages 184 and 187.
106
2012 TL
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
11/01/14 18:12:40 31TK4630_112
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
107
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:12:51 31TK4630_113
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Alarm Volume
Instruments and Controls
Select the warning alarm volume
from three levels.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired level by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
108
2012 TL
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST ALARM VOLUME’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
11/01/14 18:13:02 31TK4630_114
Multi-Information Display
Auto Interior Illumination
There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW
and MIN levels and OFF for the auto
interior illumination settings.
If you want the illuminations to start
dimming as early as possible, select
MAX. For illuminations to start
dimming as late as possible, select
MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW
for levels in between.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
To disable the auto interior
illumination function, select OFF.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
109
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
While the headlight switch is turned
on, the interior lights gradually dim,
as the outside light level gets low.
You can customize at which outside
light level the lights start to dim.
11/01/14 18:13:10 31TK4630_115
Multi-Information Display
On models with keyless access system
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
Instruments and Controls
When this item is set to ON, you will
see some guidance messages on the
multi-information display. You can
change this setting between on and
off. For more information on start
guidance messages, see page 188 .
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
INTERIOR ILLUMINATION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
110
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:13:17 31TK4630_116
Multi-Information Display
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS START GUIDANCE
SCREENS’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
111
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:13:24 31TK4630_117
Multi-Information Display
Position Setup
You can customize the MEMORY
POSITION LINK setting in position
setup.
See page 113.
Instruments and Controls
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the custom setting then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
112
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:13:35 31TK4630_118
Multi-Information Display
Memory Position Link
To set the memory positions, see
page 170 .
On models with keyless access system
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘POSITION
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
For information on using the remote,
see page 173 .
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
113
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
When Memory Position Link is set
to ON, the driver’s seat and the
outside mirrors move to the
positions stored in memory. To
cause the memory to activate, open
the driver’s door with the remote
transmitter. On models with
keyless access system, open the
driver’s door with the remote, or
grab the door handle while
carrying the remote.
11/01/14 18:13:40 31TK4630_119
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
114
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:13:50 31TK4630_120
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Setup
On models with keyless access system
There are three custom settings for
the keyless access setup:
See page 116.
Instruments and Controls
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
See page 117.
While ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP’’
is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
See page 118.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
CONTINUED
115
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:14:01 31TK4630_121
Multi-Information Display
Door Unlock Mode
Instruments and Controls
To select whether the driver’s door
or all doors unlock when you open
the driver’s door with the remote or
by grabbing the door handle (while
carrying the remote), follow these
instructions:
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL
DOORS by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, then enter your selection
by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
116
2012 TL
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘DOOR
UNLOCK MODE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
11/01/14 18:14:10 31TK4630_122
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Light Flash
The same exterior lights blink once
when you lock the doors by pushing
the door lock button while carrying
the remote.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
117
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH is set to ON, some exterior
lights blink twice when you unlock
the doors by grabbing the driver’s
door handle while carrying the
remote.
11/01/14 18:14:18 31TK4630_123
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Beep
Instruments and Controls
When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is
set to ON, the beeper sounds twice
when you unlock the doors by
grabbing the drivers door handle
while carrying the remote.
When you lock the doors by pushing
the door lock button while carrying
the remote, the beeper sounds once.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
118
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:14:26 31TK4630_124
Multi-Information Display
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
119
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:14:35 31TK4630_125
Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
Instruments and Controls
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
See page 121.
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
See page 122.
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
See page 123.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
120
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:14:46 31TK4630_126
Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (15 sec, 30
sec, or 60 sec) by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
121
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors. To change how long
the lights stay on before they fade
out, follow these instructions:
11/01/14 18:14:53 31TK4630_127
Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Instruments and Controls
The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. On models with
keyless access system, the lights go
off after the selected time when you
close the driver’s door and take the
remote with you. To change how
long the lights stay on before they go
off, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
122
2012 TL
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (60 sec, 30
sec, 15 sec or 0 sec) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
11/01/14 18:15:06 31TK4630_128
Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity
Instruments and Controls
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
and repeat the procedure again.
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button repeatedly.
LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
CONTINUED
123
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:15:14 31TK4630_129
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (MAX,
HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
124
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:15:25 31TK4630_130
Multi-Information Display
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
CONTINUED
125
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Door Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door setup:
11/01/24 16:26:48 31TK4630_131
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
See page 127.
See page 128.
See page 130.
See page 131.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
126
2012 TL
See page 133.
11/01/14 18:15:42 31TK4630_132
Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
Instruments and Controls
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
(Automatic transmission model only)
WITH VEH SPD −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
OFF −
The auto door lock is deactivated all
the time.
A/T model is shown.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
127
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:15:54 31TK4630_133
Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Unlock
There are five possible settings for
automatic transmission models and
three possible settings for manual
transmission models.
Instruments and Controls
Automatic transmission model only
ALL DOORS With IGN OFF − All
the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch* to the LOCK (0)
position.
OFF − The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
DRIVER DOOR With SHIFT to P −
The driver’s door unlocks when you
move the shift lever to Park with the
brake pedal depressed.
A/T model is shown.
Automatic transmission model only
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
ALL DOORS With SHIFT to P − All
the doors unlock when you move the
shift lever to Park with the brake
pedal depressed.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFF −
The driver’s door unlocks when you
turn the ignition switch* to the
LOCK (0) position.
* : Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
For more information, see pages 184 and 187.
128
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:16:03 31TK4630_134
Multi-Information Display
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
CONTINUED
129
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
A/T model is shown.
11/01/14 18:16:12 31TK4630_135
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Instruments and Controls
You can select whether the driver’s
door or all the doors unlock the first
time you press the unlock button on
the remote transmitter/keyless
access remote.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
130
2012 TL
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
11/01/14 18:16:22 31TK4630_136
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
When you press the UNLOCK
button on the remote transmitter or
the keyless access remote to unlock
the driver’s door/all the doors
(depending on the customize
setting), the exterior lights blink
twice to verify that the door(s) is
unlocked and the security system is
turned off.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
To turn this feature on or off, follow
these instructions.
CONTINUED
131
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
When you press the LOCK button
on the remote transmitter or the
keyless access remote, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the trunk
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 395 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
11/01/14 18:16:29 31TK4630_137
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
132
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:16:39 31TK4630_138
Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer
Instruments and Controls
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter or the keyless
access remote, but do not open any
of the doors within 30 seconds, the
doors automatically relock, and the
security system sets.
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
On models with keyless access system
When you unlock the doors by
touching either front door handle
while carrying the keyless access
remote, the relock time is fixed in 30
seconds.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
133
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:16:48 31TK4630_139
Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
134
2012 TL
To set the default settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
11/01/14 18:16:54 31TK4630_140
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
the default all setting display.
135
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:17:04 31TK4630_141
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS
(P. 387)
PADDLE SHIFTERS (P. 499)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS
(P. 139, 143)
Instruments and Controls
PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 34)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P. 143)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P. 511)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (BSI) OFF BUTTON*2
(P. 525)
HEADLIGHT WASHER
BUTTON*2 (P. 138)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 137)
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (P. 184)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 145)
*4
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
(P. 145, 169)
PHONE BUTTON*2
(P. 424)
INTERFACE DIAL*3 (P. 285)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for
SELECTOR KNOB*2 (P. 236)
HORN*1
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*3/
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 202)
STEERING WHEEL MULTI-INFORMATION
(P. 407, 425)
SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS*2 (P. 204)
ADJUSTMENTS
DISPLAY BUTTONS
KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT (P. 197)
(P. 79)
(P. 146)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 401)
A/T model with navigation system is shown.
*
*
*
*
1:
2:
3:
4:
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
Refer to the navigation system owner’s manual.
Switch location varies on models.
136
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:17:16 31TK4630_142
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
ADJUSTMENT RING
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
CONTINUED
137
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete a few more sweeps after
you release the lever.
11/01/14 18:17:24 31TK4630_143
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
Canadian SH-AWD models only
Headlight Washers
When you activate the windshield
washer with the headlights turned
on, the headlight washer will be
activated under certain conditions.
For more information, see Headlight
Washers section in the next column.
Canadian SH-AWD models only
The headlight washers use the same
fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.
HEADLIGHT WASHER BUTTON
The headlight washers can be
operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next
to the steering wheel column. The
headlights must be turned on to use
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer will automatically turn on the
first time you turn on the windshield
washers while the ignition switch* is
in the ON (II) position.
138
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:17:35 31TK4630_144
Turn Signals and Headlights
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and instrument panel
lights
4. AUTO
5. Headlights on
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the light switch on and turn the
ignition switch* to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, or with the power mode* in
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), you will
hear reminder beeps when you open
the driver’s door.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of
LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off
9. Fog lights on
CONTINUED
139
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
11/01/14 18:17:46 31TK4630_145
Headlights
High Beams − Push the left lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page 71 ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
Instruments and Controls
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO. The lights
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at
dusk, for example). The lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
The lights and indicator will turn off
automatically when the system
senses high ambient light.
On models without keyless access
system
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the
position.
On models with keyless access system
The lights will remain on when you
set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK). They will turn off
automatically when you open the
driver’s door and take the remote
with you. To turn them on again,
either set the power mode to ON or
turn the light switch to the
position.
140
2012 TL
On all models
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights
manually when driving at night or
in a dense fog, or when you enter
dark areas such as long tunnels or
parking facilities.
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see
page 123 .
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.
11/01/14 18:17:57 31TK4630_146
Headlights
LIGHT SENSOR
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 122 .
*: On models with keyless access system
Your vehicle has the engine start/stop
button instead of an ignition switch.
For more information on how to select
the power mode, see page 184 .
If you remove the key (or the vehicle
is in VEHICLE OFF mode on models
with keyless access system), and the
driver’s door is opened and closed,
the automatic lighting off feature
activates with the headlight switch in
the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, or
the lights turned on by setting the
switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position.
If you turn the ignition switch* to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door and get out, the lights turn
off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position).
* : Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
For more information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
141
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The automatic lighting off feature
turns off the headlights, all other
exterior lights, and the instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds after
you remove the key and close the
driver’s door, or on models with
keyless access system, set the power
mode* to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close
the driver’s door.
11/01/14 18:18:07 31TK4630_147
Headlights
Instruments and Controls
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights on
reminder beeper.
Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off or in
the
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
142
2012 TL
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:18:18 31TK4630_148
Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Fog Lights
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
Instruments and Controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
Instrument Panel Brightness
ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS
Adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel by pressing the +
or − button with the ignition
switch* in the ON (II) position. Press
the + button to increase the
brightness and the − button to
decrease it.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
143
11/01/14 18:18:24 31TK4630_149
Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. To cancel the glare
reduction function, set the
brightness to the highest level, then
press the + button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled.
U.S. model is shown.
The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
When the brightness reaches the
maximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESS
MAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on the
display.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, the navigation
system screen will also go to full
brightness. This can be helpful when
using the headlights during daylight
hours.
144
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:18:35 31TK4630_150
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button
Rear Window Defogger
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
models with keyless access system.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
U.S. model is shown.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger clears fog,
frost, and thin ice from the window.
Push the defogger button to turn it
on and off. The indicator in the
button comes on to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
within about 10 to 30 minutes
according to the outside temperature.
It also shuts off when you turn off
the ignition switch, or set the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) on
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 169 .
145
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
11/01/14 18:18:42 31TK4630_151
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Instruments and Controls
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
LEVER
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
146
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:18:53 31TK4630_152
Keys and Locks
On models without keyless access
system
KEY
MASTER KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE
TAG
TRANSMITTER
VALET
KEY
(GRAY)
You should have received a key
number tag with your key. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only an Acura-approved key blank.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the driver’s door lock.
You can keep the trunk pass-through
cover and the glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
CONTINUED
147
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Protect the key from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
11/01/14 18:19:02 31TK4630_153
Keys and Locks
Retractable Master Key
RELEASE BUTTON
Push
Instruments and Controls
Always make sure the key is fully
extended when you insert it to the
ignition switch. If the key is not fully
extended, the immobilizer system
may not operate properly and
prevent the engine from starting.
On models with keyless access system
The key may come in contact with
your finger while being retracted or
extended. Make sure your fingers do
not touch the pivot of the key when
retracting or extending it.
BUILT-IN KEYS
The master key can be retracted into
the remote transmitter. To use the
key, push the release button to
release the key from the transmitter.
The key should be fully extended.
To retract the key, push the release
button and at the same time push the
key into the remote transmitter until
it is securely latched.
KEY NUMBER TAG
Each keyless access remote has a
built-in key. This key is used to lock/
unlock the doors when the remote
battery becomes weak and the
power door lock/unlock operation is
disabled. You cannot start the engine
with this key.
The built-in key (see page 201 ) fits
all the locks on your vehicle.
148
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:19:12 31TK4630_154
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Acura-approved key blanks.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, or select the
ON mode* with the engine start/
stop button, the immobilizer system
indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, it means the system does not
recognize the coding of the key or
keyless access remote.
On models without keyless access
system, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, remove the
key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
On models with keyless access
system, set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select
the ON mode again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s or remote’s coding if another
immobilizer key or other metal
object (i.e. key chain) is near the
ignition switch or the keyless access
remote when you insert the key or
set the power mode* to ON.
*: On models with keyless access system
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition switch.
See page 187 for a comparison between
conventional power switches and your
engine start/stop button. For more
information on selecting the power mode,
see page 184.
CONTINUED
149
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key or keyless
access remote* (or other device) is
used, the engine’s fuel system is
disabled.
11/01/14 18:19:21 31TK4630_155
Immobilizer System
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key or
keyless access remote, contact your
dealer.
Instruments and Controls
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you have lost your key or keyless
access remote and you cannot start
the engine, contact your dealer.
Always take the ignition key or the
keyless access remote with the built-in
key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle alone.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
150
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:19:33 31TK4630_156
Ignition Switch
On models without keyless access
system
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, you must push the
key in slightly. The shift lever must
also be in Park.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
On models with keyless access system
Go to page 184 for information on
the engine start/stop button.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
151
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
11/01/14 18:19:45 31TK4630_157
Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Lock
Instruments and Controls
Unlock
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all doors.
Pushing forward the lock tab on the
driver’s door unlocks only that door.
Lock
LOCK TAB
All doors can be locked from the
outside by using the key in the
driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the key, turn it
clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors unlock when you
turn the key a second time within a
few seconds.
You can customize the door lock/
unlock settings (see page 125 ).
To lock all doors, push the front of
the master door lock switch on
either front door, pull the lock tab
rearward on the driver’s door, or
turn the key* counterclockwise in
the outside lock on the driver’s door.
*: On models with keyless access system
The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock
the doors when the remote battery becomes
becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock
operation is disabled for more information,
see page 201.
You can open or close the windows
and the moonroof by using the key
in the driver’s door (see page 208 ).
Unlock
RED INDICATOR
The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
see the red indicator on the lock tab
above the inner door handle.
152
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:19:59 31TK4630_158
Door Locks
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
lock tab rearward or push the front
of the master switch, then close the
door.
Default setting
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all
the doors lock automatically.
Automatic transmission:
Childproof Door Locks
On models without keyless access
system
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, lockout prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With any door open and the
key in the ignition switch, locking
with the master door lock switch is
disabled. If the driver’s door is
closed, the lock tab on the driver’s
door is not disabled. Pulling the
driver’s lock tab rearward will lock
all doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pulling the lock tab
rearward, the driver’s door lock
tab pops out and unlocks the
driver's
’ door.
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
Manual transmission:
When you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) after
driving, the driver’s door unlocks.
LEVER
Unlock
Lock
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
153
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
On models without keyless access
system
Lockout Prevention
11/01/24 12:55:03 31TK4630_159
Trunk
On models with keyless access system
If the doors are unlocked, press
the trunk release switch on the
trunk lid.
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
Instruments and Controls
If the doors are locked, press the
trunk release switch on the trunk
lid with the remote in keyless
access operating range.
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
You can open the trunk in any of the
following ways:
Press the trunk release button on
the driver’s door.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter
or the keyless access remote.
154
On models with keyless access system
The trunk will lock when you lock
the driver’s door with the key*, the
keyless access remote, either master
door lock switch, or the lock tab on
the driver’s door.
To unlock the trunk, turn the key*
twice to unlock the doors, push the
rear of either master door lock
switch, or push UNLOCK twice on
the keyless access remote.
* : The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock
the doors and trunk when the remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled. For more
information, see page .201
2012 TL
On models with keyless access system
To open the trunk from the outside,
push the release switch, then lift up.
11/01/14 18:20:23 31TK4630_160
Trunk
BUTTON
On all models
To close the trunk, use the inner
handle to lower the lid, then press
down on the back edge.
COVER
If your vehicle’s battery goes dead or
is disconnected, you can open the
trunk from the rear seat by pulling
the trunk release tab through the
trunk pass-through.
Pull down the rear seat armrest, then
press on the button to fully release
the cover. Reach in and locate the
trunk release tab, and pull it out.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging it,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard, page 57 .
CONTINUED
155
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
INNER
HANDLE
TRUNK RELEASE TAB
11/01/14 18:20:34 31TK4630_161
Trunk
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH
On models without keyless access
system
If you need to give the key to
someone else, give them the
valet key.
Emergency Trunk Opener
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
Instruments and Controls
On models with keyless access system
OFF
Vehicle with keyless access system is
shown.
To protect items in the trunk, you
can disable the trunk release button
on the driver’s door by turning off
the trunk main switch in the glove
box, locking the glove box, and
locking the trunk pass-through cover
with the master key or the
built-in key.
To use the valet function, remove
the built-in key from the remote by
pressing the button, then give that
remote to someone else as a valet
key (see page 201 ).
Emergency Fuel Lid Release
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency fuel lid release in the
trunk. Refer to page 599 for how to
access it.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever in the direction indicated by
the arrow.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 40 .
156
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:20:46 31TK4630_162
Remote Transmitter
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
On models without keyless access
system
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push LOCK
twice within 5 seconds, you will hear
a beep to verify that the doors are
locked and the security system has
set. You cannot lock the doors if any
door is not fully closed or if the key
is in the ignition switch.
The keyless lock acknowledgment
beep and flashing of the lights can
be deactivated (see page 131 ).
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
You can also open all power windows
and the moonroof from outside the
vehicle with the remote transmitter
(see page 207 ).
To change the lock/unlock setting
and the relock timer setting, refer to
the customized settings on page 125 .
The door activated map lights come
on when you press the UNLOCK
button if the door activated position
is selected. If you do not open any
door within 30 seconds (or whatever
setting of the interior light dimming
time is set to), the light(s) will fade
out. If you relock the doors with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the light(s)
will go off immediately.
CONTINUED
157
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
TRUNK
BUTTON
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door or all the
doors (depending on the keyless
memory setting). Press it twice to
unlock the other doors. Some
exterior lights will flash twice each
time you press the button.
11/01/14 18:21:02 31TK4630_163
Remote Transmitter
TRUNK − Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.
Instruments and Controls
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperatures.
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
On models with keyless access
system, see page 181 for how to
replace the battery on the keyless
access remote.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
158
2012 TL
SCREW
KEYPAD
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw
can strip out.
2. Separate the keypad from the
transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.
11/01/14 18:21:12 31TK4630_164
Remote Transmitter
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
3. Place a cloth on the edge of the
keypad to prevent scratches, and
remove the upper half by carefully
prying on the edge with a small
flat-tip screwdriver or coin.
5. Snap the two halves of the keypad,
then install the parts in reverse
order.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
159
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
BATTERY
4. Remove the old battery and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (− side facing up), then
insert it in the keypad.
11/01/14 18:21:23 31TK4630_165
Remote Transmitter
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
Driver 1
Driver 2
Instruments and Controls
The driving position memory
activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is
shown on the back of each
transmitter. Make sure you store
your desired driving position in the
memory that is activated by the
transmitter you normally carry.
Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Customized settings
(see page 94 ).
When you unlock the driver’s
door with your remote
transmitter, each remote
transmitter activates the
customized settings related to
that remote.
Driving position memory
(see page 170 ).
Audio system settings
(see page 236 ).
Climate control settings
(see page 226 ).
160
2012 TL
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote, the
driver’s seat (except power lumbar)
and outside mirrors move to the
positions stored in memory. An
indicator on one of the driving
position memory buttons on the
driver’s door also comes on.
You will also see the ‘‘DRIVER 1’’
or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ message on the
multi- information display,
depending on which linked remote
transmitter is used.
11/01/14 18:21:42 31TK4630_166
Seats
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
Front Seat Power Adjustments
See pages 13 − 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any lumbar adjustment.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Driver’s seat only:
Driver’s seat
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button instead of
an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode
is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode
is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON
Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
161
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch* in any position.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
11/01/14 18:21:51 31TK4630_167
Seats
Instruments and Controls
The driver’s seat includes a memory
feature. Two seat positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
can then select a memorized position
by pushing the appropriate memory
button. Refer to page 170 for how to
memorize and select the seat
positions.
Head Restraints
Passenger’s seat
See page 15 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
162
2012 TL
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
11/01/14 18:22:00 31TK4630_168
Seats
Front
CUSHION
Rear Center
CUSHION
RELEASE
BUTTON
Rear Outer
TILT BUTTON
LEGS
RELEASE BUTTON
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
To lower either rear outer head
restraint for better visibility, press
the tilt button on the side of the head
restraint. It folds down backward. To
raise the rear outer head restraint,
pull it up from behind by hand. Make
sure the head restraint locks in
position when you lower or raise it.
Adjusting the Head Restraint
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise a front or rear
center head restraint, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
163
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
SEATBACK
11/01/14 18:22:08 31TK4630_169
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
Instruments and Controls
To remove a front or rear center
head restraint for cleaning or repair,
pull it up as far as it will go. Push the
release button, then pull the restraint
out of the seat-back.
Rear Outer
TILT BUTTON
Failure to reinstall, or correctly
reinstall, the head restraints can
result in severe injury during a
crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
RELEASE BUTTON
To remove either rear outer head
restraint, push the tilt button, then
fold the head restraint backward.
Push the release button, then pull
the restraint out of the seat-back.
164
2012 TL
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
11/01/14 18:22:20 31TK4630_170
Seats
Active Head Restraints
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by an Acura dealer.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Acura
replacement head restraints.
165
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper
spine.
11/01/14 18:22:31 31TK4630_171
Seats
Armrest
Front
Trunk Pass-through Cover
Rear
BUTTON To lock
Instruments and Controls
COVER
The lid of the console compartment
can be used as an armrest.
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
A beverage holder is located in the
armrest.
166
2012 TL
To open the cover, pull down the
rear seat armrest, then press on the
button to fully release the cover. To
close the cover, swing it up, and push
firmly on the top. Make sure it
latches properly.
11/01/14 18:22:41 31TK4630_172
Seats, Mirrors
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the passthrough are secured.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
master key(the built-in key on
models with keyless access system).
To lock the cover, insert the key, and
turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 57 .
SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
There is also a sensor on the back of
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect its
perf ormance.
CONTINUED
167
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
Mirrors
11/01/14 18:22:53 31TK4630_173
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
3. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Instruments and Controls
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 170 ).
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in
reverse, the selected mirror will
tilt down slightly to improve your
view as you parallel park. Shifting
out of reverse will return the
mirror to its original position.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
1. With the ignition switch* in the
ON (II) position, move the
selector switch to the L (driver’s
side), or R (passenger’s side).
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.
2. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
168
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:23:02 31TK4630_174
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters
This heated mirror function has a
timer (see page 145 ).
Instruments and Controls
If the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), the heated mirror
function will come on automatically
for 10 minutes when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, or the power mode* ON,
turn on the heaters by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on as a reminder. Press the
button again to turn the heaters off.
Pressing this button also turns the
rear window defogger on and off.
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
169
11/01/14 18:23:14 31TK4630_175
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Instruments and Controls
Seat, except for power lumbar, and
outside mirror positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
select a memorized position by
pushing the appropriate button or
using the appropriate remote
transmitter or the keyless access
remote (Driver 1 or Driver 2).
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
1. Turn the ignition switch* to the
ON (II) position. You cannot add a
new driving position to the
memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 161 ).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 168 ).
170
2012 TL
MEMORY BUTTONS
SET BUTTON
3. Press and release the SET button
on the control panel. You will hear
a beep. Immediately press and
hold one of the memory buttons (1
or 2) until you hear two beeps.
The indicator in the memory
button will come on. The current
positions of the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors are now stored.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:23:27 31TK4630_176
Driving Position Memory System
To cancel the storing procedure
after pressing the SET button, do
any of the following:
Selecting a Memorized Position
MEMORY BUTTONS
Press the SET button again within
5 seconds.
Readjust the seat position.
Readjust the outside mirror
position.
To select a memorized position, do
this:
On models without keyless access
system
1. Make sure the parking brake is set
and the shift lever is in Park
(automatic).
Turn the ignition switch out from
the ON (II) position.
On models with keyless access system
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
Change the power mode out
from ON.
CONTINUED
171
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Fail to press a memory button
within 5 seconds.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
11/01/14 18:23:38 31TK4630_177
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the driver’s
door: SET, memory button 1 or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
To change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting, see
page 113.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
On vehicles with manual transmission
Release the parking brake
(manual).
If the parking brake is not set,
you must press and hold the
memory button until the
adjustment is complete.
Shift out of Park (automatic).
172
2012 TL
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized positions. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
11/01/14 18:23:54 31TK4630_178
Keyless Access System
On models with navigation system
The system may not work if:
The battery of the remote is weak.
There is strong electrical current
nearby.
You carry a cell phone, a laptop
computer, or other electrical
device near the remote.
The remote is covered by metal.
A vehicle is being operated with a
transmitter nearby.
When the remote battery is dead.
When the vehicle battery is dead.
Each keyless access remote has a
built-in key. This key is used to lock/
unlock the doors when the remote
battery becomes weak and the
power door lock/unlock operation is
disabled. You cannot start the engine
with this key.
Make sure the driver always carries
the remote/built-in key set.
Always keep the remote and the
built-in key away from any magnetic
material.
You should have received a key
number tag with your built-in key.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Use only Acura-approved key blanks.
Protect the remote and the built-in
key from direct sunlight, high
temperature, and high humidity.
Do not drop the remote or the
built-in key, and do not set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the remote and the built-in key
away from liquids. If they get wet,
dry them immediately with a soft
cloth.
The built-in keys do not contain
batteries.
173
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Your vehicle has a keyless access
system. This system allows you to
operate the vehicle without an
ignition key. When you carry the
remote with you, you can lock/
unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk,
and start the engine.
11/01/14 18:24:06 31TK4630_179
Keyless Access System
Keys
BUILT-IN KEYS
KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTES
Instruments and Controls
OPERATING
RANGE
KEY NUMBER TAG
The following keys come with your
vehicle. Refer to page 201 for how to
separate the keys.
Built-in Key
Keyless Access Remote
This remote is used to lock/unlock
the doors and unlock the trunk.
When you carry the remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors, unlock the
trunk, and start the engine.
This key is used to lock/unlock the
doors, glove box, and trunk passthrough cover.
You can lock/unlock the doors
within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm)
radius from the outside door handle.
You can open the trunk within about
a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from
the trunk release switch.
Anyone can lock/unlock a door or
open the trunk if the remote is
within the operating range of the
door or the trunk.
174
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:24:22 31TK4630_180
Keyless Access System
The remote may not work if:
Unlocking the Door(s)
It is too close to the vehicle.
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page 116 .
Each front door has a LOCK/
UNLOCK feature.
All the doors unlock when you grab
the handle of the front passenger’s
door.
The handle of each front door has a
sensor. That sensor works with the
remote so you can automatically
unlock the door(s).
By default, only the driver’s door
unlocks when you grab its handle.
When you unlock the door(s), some
exterior lights blink twice and the
system beeps twice.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see
page 117 .
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 118 .
CONTINUED
175
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
It is above or below the vehicle,
even when it is within its operating
range.
To unlock the remaining doors and
the trunk, press the UNLOCK
button on the remote or the rear of
the master door lock switch on the
driver’s door.
11/01/14 18:24:33 31TK4630_181
Keyless Access System
If you wear a glove while grabbing a
front door handle, the door sensor
may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
Instruments and Controls
If you do not open any of the doors
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by unlocking the doors.
Each unlock sensor does not operate
when:
Locking the Doors
The remote is not within the
operating range.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
When the doors are unlocked.
The remote battery is dead.
The vehicle battery is dead.
DOOR LOCK BUTTON
When you press the door lock button
on the front door, all the doors and
the trunk will lock.
Before locking the doors, make sure
the remote is not inside the vehicle.
176
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:24:49 31TK4630_182
Keyless Access System
When you lock the doors, some
exterior lights blink and the system
beeps once. If no exterior lights blink
and/or no beeper sounds, check to
see if the trunk or hood is open.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 118 .
Within 2 seconds of pressing the
door lock button or locking the doors
with the remote, pull the handle to
make sure the doors are actually
locked. The door unlock sensors will
not operate for about 2 seconds after
the doors are locked.
The remote is not within the
operating range.
Any door is open.
The power mode is not set to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The remote is in the keyless
access slot.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
The remote battery is dead.
Door Lock Prevention
If you open the driver’s door, pull its
lock tab rearward on the door, and
shut it when the remote is inside the
vehicle, the driver’s door will unlock.
Make sure you carry the remote
with you when you lock the doors.
This function is also activated on the
front passenger’s door. If you open
the front passenger’s door, and shut
it after pulling its lock tab rearward
when the remote is inside the vehicle,
all doors will unlock.
The door lock prevention will also
activate if you try to lock the doors
with the master door lock switch
when the remote is inside the vehicle.
The vehicle battery is dead.
177
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see
page 117.
The door lock button does not
work if:
11/01/14 18:25:04 31TK4630_183
Keyless Access System
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk
When you close the trunk with all
doors locked, the trunk will lock.
Opening and Closing the Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
Push the trunk release switch
when carrying the remote (if the
doors are locked).
Instruments and Controls
When you unlock all the doors with
the remote, built-in key or power
door lock master switch, the trunk
will unlock.
The trunk cannot be locked if:
The remote is too close to the
trunk lid.
The remote is on the interior rear
panel.
The remote is too close to the
seat-back of the rear seat or the
seat cushion.
You can open the trunk in any of
these ways:
Push the trunk release switch
when the doors are unlocked.
Press the trunk release button
inside the vehicle.
Press the trunk button on the
remote.
178
2012 TL
INNER HANDLE
To close the trunk, use the inner
handle to lower the lid, then press
down on the back edge.
11/01/14 18:25:14 31TK4630_184
Keyless Access System
Before closing the trunk, make sure
the remote is not in the trunk.
Keyless Access Remote
LOCK
BUTTON
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 57 .
UNLOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
When you cannot set the security
system because the trunk or hood is
open, no exterior light blinks and/or
no beeper sounds.
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push the LOCK
button twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and the security
system is set.
CONTINUED
179
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
LED
If you close the trunk when the
remote is in it, the system beeps, and
the trunk reopens.
You cannot lock the doors if any
door is not fully closed, if the remote
is in the keyless access remote slot,
or if the power mode is in any
position except VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
11/01/14 18:25:23 31TK4630_185
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button. The
door activated map lights (if the door
activated light switch is set) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any door within 30 seconds, the map
lights fade out. If you relock the
doors with the remote before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see
page 130 .
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME,’’ see page 121 .
If you unlock the doors with the
remote, but do not open any door
within 30 seconds, the doors
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see
page 133 .
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see
page 131 .
180
2012 TL
TRUNK − Press this button for
about 1 second to open the trunk.
You cannot open the trunk with the
exterior trunk release switch if the
remote is in the keyless access
remote slot, or the power mode is in
any position except VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). You cannot open the trunk
with the remote if the trunk main
switch in the glove box is turned off.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote.
11/01/14 18:25:37 31TK4630_186
Keyless Access System
Replacing the Remote Battery
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the built-in key (see
page 201 ).
2. Place a cloth on the edge to
prevent scratches, then remove
the upper half by carefully prying
on the edge with a coin.
3. Replace the old battery with a new
battery. Place the battery so the +
side is facing up. Snap the two
halves of the remote case back
together.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
181
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Replace the battery if necessary.
Battery type: CR2032
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
11/01/14 18:25:52 31TK4630_187
Keyless Access System
Recalling a
Memorized Driving Position
Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Driving position memory
(see page 170 ).
Instruments and Controls
Customized settings
(see page 94 ).
Audio system settings
(see page 285 ).
DRIVER’S ID
When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
customized settings related to that
remote. The driver’s ID (Driver 1 or
Driver 2) is shown on the back of
each remote.
Climate control settings
(see page 227 ).
Navigation system preferences
(see the navigation system
manual).
182
2012 TL
Remote Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote.
Protect the remote from extreme
temperatures.
Do not immerse the remote in any
liquid.
If you lose a remote, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
11/01/14 18:25:59 31TK4630_188
Keyless Access System
Engine Start/Stop Button Operating Range
Make sure you know where the remote
is when you are inside the vehicle.
Make sure you always carry the remote
with you.
The engine may not run, and some
malfunctions may occur, if the
remote is outside the vehicle.
The engine may not start if the
remote is subjected to strong radio
waves.
Also, the engine may not start if the
remote is too close to the windows.
183
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Remember that you can start the engine
when the remote is inside the vehicle.
11/01/14 18:26:10 31TK4630_189
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
Engine Start/Stop Button
Operation
This system uses the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch to start and stop the engine. If
you are carrying the keyless access
remote, you can start the engine by
pressing the engine start/stop
button with the brake pedal
(automatic transmission) or the
clutch pedal (manual transmission)
depressed. You can also stop the
engine by pushing this button when
the vehicle is stopped.
Switching the Power Modes
The keyless access system has four
power modes: VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK), ACCESSORY, ON, and
START.
Each time you press the engine
start/stop button without pressing
the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission) while
carrying the keyless access remote,
the power mode switches between
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
ACCESSORY, and ON.
Automatic transmission:
You can start the engine at any time
by pressing the engine start/stop
button, while pressing the brake
pedal, with the shift lever in Park or
neutral position.
Manual transmission:
You can start the engine at any time
by pressing the engine start/stop
184
2012 TL
button, while pressing the clutch
pedal fully, with the shift lever in any
gear position.
Changing the Power Mode without
Starting the Engine
To change the power mode without
turning on the engine, press the
engine start/stop button without
pressing the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission). The power
mode will be changed as shown on
the next page.
11/01/14 18:26:19 31TK4630_190
Keyless Access System
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button comes on green.
Some electrical components such as the
audio system and accessory power sockets
can be operated.
ON
Indicator in the button remains green when
the engine is not running.
(If the engine is running,this indicator is off.)
All electrical components can be used.
Do the following without pressing the brake pedal.
: Press the engine start/stop button.
: Press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P.
: Shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button.
: Press the engine start/stop button
without pressing the clutch pedal.
CONTINUED
185
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:26:28 31TK4630_191
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
How the mode is switched depends
on if the shift lever is in Park or not.
Each time you press the engine
start/stop button without pressing
the clutch pedal, the power mode
switches between VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ON
modes. To change the mode from
ON to ACCESSORY, or
ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK), press the engine start/stop
button twice.
With the shift lever in Park, the
power mode changes from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) when you
push the engine start/stop button.
To change the mode from ON to
ACCESSORY with the shift lever
position in Park, take your foot off
the brake and press the engine
start/stop button twice.
To change the mode from
ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK), shift to Park, then press
the engine start/stop button twice.
186
2012 TL
NOTE: If the keyless access system
main switch in the glove box is off,
make sure to insert the keyless
access remote into the keyless
access slot to turn on your vehicle’s
power mode. For more information,
refer to page 195 .
To remove the keyless access
remote from the slot, make sure the
power mode is VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
11/01/14 18:26:45 31TK4630_192
Keyless Access System
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
Engine is turned off.
Normal key position while
driving.
Use this position to start
the engine.
All electrical components
can be used.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.
ON
START
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical components
can be used.
Power Mode
With Keyless
Access System and
Engine Start/Stop
Button
Some electrical components
such as the audio system
and accessory power
sockets can be operated.
VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)
ACCESSORY
Indicator-Off
Engine is turned off
and power is shut
down.
Indicator-Green
Engine is turned off.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical
components can be
used.
Green OFF
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and
accessory power sockets
can be operated.
IndicatorGreen (engine is turned off)
Off (engine is running)
All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off
The mode
automatically returns
to ON after the
engine starts.
187
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Without Keyless
Access System
LOCK (0)
11/01/14 18:26:59 31TK4630_193
Keyless Access System
Starting the Engine
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
Starting Guidance
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
TO START ENGINE:
A/T
Instruments and Controls
BRAKE PEDAL
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You can start the engine in any
power mode.
To start the engine:
Automatic Transmission
1. Move the shift lever to Park (P).
2. Depress the brake pedal and press
the engine start/stop button.
CLUTCH PEDAL
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Manual Transmission
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Press the clutch pedal down all
the way.
The engine does not start unless
the clutch pedal is pressed.
3. Press the engine start/stop button.
188
2012 TL
TO TURN
ACCESSORY ON:
M/T
After you unlock and open the
driver’s door, you will see the ‘‘TO
START ENGINE:’’ message on the
multi-information display. The ‘‘TO
TURN ACCESSORY ON:’’ message
will be shown after three seconds.
The display switches between the
‘‘TO START ENGINE:’’ and ‘‘TO
TURN ACCESSORY ON:’’ messages
every three seconds.
11/01/14 18:27:08 31TK4630_194
Keyless Access System
When the keyless access system main
switch in the glove box is off, the multi-
To unlock the steering wheel
TO UNLOCK WHEEL
After entering the vehicle, insert the
keyless access remote into the slot
to start the engine (see page 197 ).
If the steering wheel is locked, the
engine cannot start. The multiinformation display shows you the
above message and the indicator in
the engine start/stop button blinks.
To unlock the steering wheel, apply
force by turning it left and right
while pressing the engine start/stop
button at the same time.
189
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
information display shows the
‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE
INTO SLOT’’ message, then the ‘‘TO
START ENGINE:’’ message will be
shown after you insert the remote
into the slot. Each time you press the
engine start/stop button, the
‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE
INTO SLOT’’ message is shown on
the multi-information display if the
remote is not in the slot.
NOTE:
If the keyless access remote battery
dies, you may have to use the built-in
key to unlock/lock the vehicle. The
built-in key is stored inside the
keyless access remote (see
page 201 ).
11/01/14 18:27:22 31TK4630_195
Keyless Access System
Stopping the Engine
Manual Transmission
Instruments and Controls
If the shift lever is in neutral, press
the engine start/stop button.
If the shift lever is in any gear
other than neutral, depress the
clutch pedal, then press the engine
start/stop button.
Operation Guidance
SHIFT TO PARK
The engine stops and the power
mode switches from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
A/T model
To turn the vehicle off, make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped and
do the following.
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure it is off. You can verify if the
power is off by checking the engine
start/stop button LED indicator.
On manual transmission models
Automatic Transmission
1. Shift to park (P).
2. Press the engine start/stop button
with your foot on the brake pedal.
Make sure to press the brake pedal
or set the parking brake before
turning off the engine. If your foot is
OFF the clutch pedal in any gear
position, pressing the engine start/
stop button turns off the engine, and
the vehicle may move forward or
backward.
190
2012 TL
A/T model only
On automatic transmission models
You can only place the vehicle in the
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode if the
transmission is in Park. You will see
the ‘‘SHIFT TO PARK’’ message on
the multi-information display if you
press the engine start/stop button to
turn the vehicle off with the shift
lever in any other position except for
P (Park).
11/01/14 18:27:32 31TK4630_196
Keyless Access System
TO TURN VEHICLE OFF
ACCESSORY MODE
Press the engine start/stop button
twice with your foot off the brake
pedal (automatic transmission) or
the clutch pedal (manual
transmission) to change the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure it is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
CONTINUED
191
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
All models
If the power mode is in ACCESSORY,
you may see the ‘‘ACCESSORY
MODE’’ message on the multiinformation display.
After the driver’s door is opened, you
will see the ‘‘TO TURN VEHICLE
OFF:’’ message on the multiinformation display. Press the engine
start/stop button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change
the power mode from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door in the
ACCESSORY mode, a beeper will
sound. You will also see a
‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ or ‘‘TO
TURN VEHICLE OFF:’’ message on
the multi-information display.
11/01/14 18:27:40 31TK4630_197
Keyless Access System
Emergency Engine Stop
Instruments and Controls
The engine start/stop button may be
used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while
driving. If you must stop the engine,
do either of the following operations:
Press and hold the engine start/
stop button for three seconds.
Firmly press the engine start/stop
button three times.
Do not press the button while driving
unless it is absolutely necessary for
the engine to be switched off.
If you are driving, the power mode
switches from ON to ACCESSORY
or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
whenever you perform either
procedure. However, the steering
wheel will NOT lock.
If you cannot stop the engine by
pressing the engine start/stop
button once when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in Park
(automatic transmission), do either
emergency engine stop procedure.
In this case, the power mode will
change to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
however, the steering wheel may
NOT lock.
192
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:27:50 31TK4630_198
Keyless Access System
Beeper and Message
Keyless Remote Not Detected
The displayed message goes away
when you bring the remote back
inside the vehicle.
If you take the keyless access
remote out of the vehicle and close
the door with the power mode ON or
ACCESSORY, the inside and outside
beepers sound and a ‘‘KEYLESS
REMOTE NOT DETECTED’’
message will be displayed on the
multi-information display, and the
doors will not lock.
Even when the remote is inside the
vehicle, the beeper may sound when
the location of the remote is not
detected due to surrounding
conditions. It is not a failure. Make
sure that you carry the remote with
you.
The outside beeper sounds when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY, and
a door is opened, then closed.
CONTINUED
193
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
If the engine is running and you take
the remote out of the vehicle, it will
continue to run, and the inside and
outside beepers will sound. Once the
power mode is changed to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK), the engine will not
restart until you bring back a remote
into the vehicle.
The engine does not start if you push
the engine start/stop button when
the remote is outside the vehicle.
Check where the remote is. Make
sure that the remote is in the vehicle
with you when you operate the
engine start/stop button.
11/01/14 18:27:58 31TK4630_199
Keyless Access System
Keyless Remote Low Battery
Instruments and Controls
The battery in the remote normally
lasts about 2 years. To ensure
maximum battery life, do not store
the remote close to electrical devices
such as computers or TVs. When the
multi-information display shows
‘‘CHANGE KEYLESS REMOTE
BATTERY,’’ replace the battery as
soon as possible (see page 181 ).
If the remote battery becomes weak
and the power door lock/unlock
operation is disabled, you should
insert the remote into the keyless
access remote slot to set the power
mode and start the engine. After
inserting the remote into the slot,
operate the engine start/stop button
as previously described (see pages
184 and 187 ). For more information
on the keyless access slot, see
page 197 .
Inserting the remote does not
charge the remote battery. You
should replace the battery as soon
as possible.
194
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:28:09 31TK4630_200
Keyless Access System
Keyless Access Remote System
Main Switch
NOTE: Turning off the keyless
access system will disable lockout
prevention.
OFF
This indicator normally comes on for
several seconds when you change
the power mode to ON.
MAIN SWITCH
This switch is in the glove box. You
can cancel the keyless access system
features, which are locking/
unlocking the doors, unlocking the
trunk, and starting the engine while
carrying the keyless access remote.
To cancel the system, turn the
keyless access system main switch
off by pushing it down.
CONTINUED
195
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
With the keyless access remote
system main switch off, you should
insert the keyless access remote into
the keyless remote slot to start the
engine. For more information, see
page 197 .
Keyless Access System
Indicator
According to the message on the
multi-information display, this
indicator has two indications. A
‘‘CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS
SYSTEM’’ message indicates a
problem with the keyless access
system. A ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
STARTING SYSTEM’’ message
indicates a problem with the keyless
starting system.
11/01/14 18:28:21 31TK4630_201
Keyless Access System
Check Keyless Access System
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR
The multi-information display
shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM.’’
Check Keyless Starting System
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR
Instruments and Controls
In this case, use the built-in key to
lock/unlock the doors and insert the
keyless access remote into the slot
to start the engine (see page 197 ).
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer if:
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer if:
The keyless access system
indicator comes on and stays on
while you are driving.
The keyless access system
indicator comes on and stays on
while you are driving.
The indicator comes on after the
engine has started.
The indicator comes on and stays
on in any power mode.
196
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:28:32 31TK4630_202
Keyless Access System
The multi-information display
shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
STARTING SYSTEM.’’
Keyless Access Remote Slot
SLOT
If the keyless access remote has
been inserted into the slot with the
keyless access remote system main
switch in the glove box turned off, it
will lock into place when the power is
on. The slot will unlock when the
power is turned off.
KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE
In the following two cases, you have
to insert the keyless access remote
into the keyless access remote slot
to set the power mode and start the
engine:
NOTE: If the keyless access remote
does not come out of the slot easily,
try to push it in before pulling it out.
Make sure the vehicle is in
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.
If the remote battery becomes
weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
When the keyless access remote
system main switch in the glove
box is set to off.
CONTINUED
197
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
In this case, you should not shut off
your engine until you are in a safe
location or at your dealer, as your
vehicle may not restart.
To remove the keyless access
remote, place the vehicle in the
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, then
pull out the keyless access remote.
11/01/14 18:28:45 31TK4630_203
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
On automatic transmission models
Unlocked Keyless Access Remote
The multi-information display shows
the ‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ or ‘‘TO
UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE
TURN OFF POWER’’ message to
remind you to change the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
When the keyless access remote
system main switch in the glove box
is set to ON, the remote remains
unlocked when you insert it into the
keyless access remote slot and the
power mode is turned on.
Operation Guidance
To insert the keyless access remote:
On manual transmission models
The multi-information display shows
the ‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ message
to remind you that the power mode
is in ACCESSORY.
When you open the driver’s door,
and each time you press the engine
start/stop button, you will see the
‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE
INTO SLOT’’ message on the multiinformation display in the following
situations:
On all models
To avoid damaging the slot, do not
insert any other objects into the slot
or put a sticker on the keyless access
remote.
Inserting the remote does not charge
the remote battery. If necessary, you
should replace the battery as soon
as possible.
When the keyless access system
main switch (see page 195 ) is off.
When the keyless access remote
is not in the vehicle.
198
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:28:53 31TK4630_204
Keyless Access System
To unlock the keyless access remote:
On automatic transmission models
In ACCESSORY mode, the
‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ message will
be displayed a few seconds after the
‘‘TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE
TURN OFF POWER’’ message
is displayed.
When the keyless access remote
system main switch in the glove box
is set to OFF, the multi-information
display will show the ‘‘TO UNLOCK
KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF
POWER’’ message after you shift
to Park.
CONTINUED
199
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
The message reminds you that the
keyless access remote is locked in
the keyless access remote slot, and
that the power mode is in the
ACCESSORY or ON position. To
remove the keyless access remote,
turn the power mode off by pressing
the engine start/stop button twice
(in ACCESSORY mode) or once (in
ON mode) without pressing the
brake pedal.
11/01/14 18:29:02 31TK4630_205
Keyless Access System
To remove the keyless access remote:
If you turn off the vehicle and leave
the remote in the keyless access
remote slot, you will also hear a
reminder beeper.
Instruments and Controls
If the vehicle is left in the
ACCESSORY mode, the ‘‘TO TURN
VEHICLE OFF’’ message is shown
on the multi-information display
when you open the driver’s door. If
the vehicle is left in the VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) mode with the keyless
access remote in the slot, the
‘‘REMOVE KEYLESS REMOTE
FROM SLOT’’ message is shown on
the multi-information display.
200
2012 TL
On automatic transmission models
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can press the engine
start/stop button twice without
pressing the brake pedal to set the
vehicle into the VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode.
11/01/14 18:29:12 31TK4630_206
Keyless Access System
BUILT-IN KEY
To avoid damaging the remote and
the built-in key, never pull on the
built-in key unless you are pressing
the release button.
The keyless access system uses an
electric field to identify the remote.
If you use medical equipment such
as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your
doctor if the electric field used by
the remote will affect it.
Valet Function
The trunk and glove box cannot be
opened when you turn the trunk
main switch off and lock the glove
box and trunk pass-through cover
with the built-in key. Then, the trunk
cannot be opened by using the
remote or the exterior trunk release
switch.
Remove the built-in key from the
remote by pressing the button, then
give that remote to someone else as
a valet key.
RELEASE BUTTON
To remove the built-in key, pull it out
while pressing the release button. To
reinstall the built-in key, push the
key into the remote until it clicks.
201
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Built-in key and Remote
The built-in key can be used to lock/
unlock the doors and the trunk when
the remote battery becomes weak
and the power door lock/unlock
operation is disabled.
11/01/14 18:29:20 31TK4630_207
Seat Heaters
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
Passenger’s Seat
Instruments and Controls
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
HEATERS
Driver’s Seat
TL and TL with Technology Package
models
SH-AWD and SH-AWD with Technology
Package models
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back.
The ignition switch* must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters.
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
202
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:29:29 31TK4630_208
Seat Heaters
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Heat induced burns are
possible when using seat
heaters.
Persons with a diminished
ability to sense temperature
(e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or
paralysis) or with sensitive skin
should not use seat heaters.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
203
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Do not use the seat heater in the
HI setting for an extended period,
because it draws large amounts of
current from the battery.
A multi-information display message
may inform you when the battery
charge is getting low. See page
87 for more information.
11/01/14 18:29:38 31TK4630_209
Seat Heaters and Ventilations
Passenger’s
seat
Instruments and Controls
HEATERS
SEAT HEATER BUTTON
Driver’s
seat
TL with Advance Package and Canadian
Elite Package models
SH-AWD with Advance Package and
Canadian SH-AWD Elite Package
models
INDICATORS
SEAT VENTILATION
BUTTON
You must select the ON mode by
operating the engine start/stop
button (see page 185 ) to use the
heaters and the air ventilation
system.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters and an air ventilation
system. The passenger seat only has
heaters in the seat bottom because
of the side airbag system.
204
2012 TL
To use the heaters, press the seat
heater button. The indicator (red)
above the button will come on. There
are four settings in the heaters:
HI − Three indicators on.
MID − Two indicators on.
LO − One indicator on.
OFF − All indicators off.
When you press the seat heater
button once, the heater is set to HI.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select MID or LOW by
pressing the seat heater button. This
will keep the seat warm. To shut
down the heater, press the seat
heater button until the indicators
go off.
11/01/14 18:29:48 31TK4630_210
Seat Heaters and Ventilations
When you press the seat ventilation
button once, the system is set to HI.
To change to the lower mode, press
the seat ventilation button. To turn
the air ventilation off, press the seat
ventilation button until the indicators
go off.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters and the seat
ventilation:
Do not use the seat heater or the
seat ventilation in the HI setting
for an extended period, because it
draws large amounts of current
from the battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters or the seat ventilation,
even on the LO setting. It can
weaken the battery, causing hard
starting.
A multi-information display message
may inform you when the battery
charge is getting low. See page
87 for more information.
Heat induced burns are
possible when using seat
heaters.
Persons with a diminished
ability to sense temperature
(e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or
paralysis) or with sensitive skin
should not use seat heaters.
The heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off
after a period of time.
205
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
To ventilate the seat, press the seat
ventilation button. The indicator
(blue) above the button will come on.
The air ventilation system has four
settings:
HI − Three indicators on.
MID − Two indicators on.
LO − One indicator on.
OFF − All indicators off.
11/01/14 18:29:57 31TK4630_211
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
INDICATOR
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Instruments and Controls
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
AUTO − To open either front
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
To close either front window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.
FRONT PASSENGER’S
MAIN SWITCH
WINDOW SWITCH
Turn the ignition switch* to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
206
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:30:08 31TK4630_212
Power Windows
The windows and the main switch
will operate for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch
(set VEHICLE OFF mode on models
with keyless access system).
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
Auto Reverse
If either front window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter/Keyless Access
Remote
Vehicle without
keyless access
system
UNLOCK BUTTON
Vehicle with
keyless access
system
UNLOCK BUTTON
NOTE: The driver’s window auto
reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the
remote transmitter (the keyless
access remote on models with
keyless access system).
CONTINUED
207
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Use the main
switch when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch
again. The switch will pop out and
the indicator will go off.
11/01/14 18:30:22 31TK4630_213
Power Windows
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Instruments and Controls
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
remaining doors unlock, and all
four windows and the moonroof
start to open. To stop the windows
and moonroof, release the button.
3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key or the
Built-in key
Vehicle without keyless access system
Open
Close
Open
Close
BUILT-IN KEY
Vehicle with keyless access system
You can open and close the windows
and moonroof with the key in the
driver’s door lock.
208
2012 TL
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.
4. To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
11/01/14 18:30:30 31TK4630_214
Power Windows
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Instruments and Controls
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
4. To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
209
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:30:40 31TK4630_215
Moonroof
Open
MOONROOF SWITCH
Instruments and Controls
Tilt
Close
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
and hold it. Release the switch to
stop the operation.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
AUTO − To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
210
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:30:48 31TK4630_216
Moonroof
To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
You can use the remote transmitter/
keyless access remote or the key/
built-in key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
207 for details.
Instruments and Controls
Auto Reverse
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch, on
models with keyless access system,
set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK). Opening either front
door cancels this function.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
211
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:30:54 31TK4630_217
Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page 65 ).
PARKING
BRAKE LEVER
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 65 ).
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
212
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:30:59 31TK4630_218
Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COAT HOOK
FRONT DOOR POCKET
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
VANITY MIRROR
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SUN VISOR
REAR DOOR POCKET
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
SIDE POCKET
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
CARGO HOOKS
BEVERAGE HOLDER in
REAR SEAT ARMREST
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
213
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:31:07 31TK4630_219
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
FRONT
Instruments and Controls
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Open the front beverage holder by
sliding its cover backward.
REAR
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.
To open the rear beverage holder,
pull out the lid by the tab. To close it,
push it down.
214
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:31:18 31TK4630_220
Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Sockets
FRONT
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Pull up the lid.
Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets. One is next to the
shift lever. The other is in the
console compartment.
To access the front accessory socket,
slide the lid forward until it latches.
To close it, push in on the lid to slide
it backward.
None of the sockets will power
an automotive type cigarette
lighter element.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch* must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects from getting into
the socket.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button instead
of an ignition switch. ) ACCESSORY Mode is
the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information,
see pages 184 and 187.
215
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Slide the lid
forward.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
11/01/14 18:31:28 31TK4630_221
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Console Compartment
Instruments and Controls
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
To lock
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
To open the console compartment,
push in on the lever and lift the
armrest. To close, lower the armrest,
and push it down until it latches.
Open the glove box by pulling out
the handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key or the built-in key on
models with keyless access system.
Make sure to slide back the tray
before opening the console
compartment.
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
216
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:31:39 31TK4630_222
Interior Convenience Items
Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor
SUN VISOR
You can put small items in the
sliding tray located in the console
compartment lid. To use the tray,
push it in to open it, then slide out
fully. Make sure to slide back the
tray firmly until you hear a click
when not in use.
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror lights come on
when you pull up the cover.
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You
can also use a sun visor at the side
window. Remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
You can extend the sun visor further
by pulling it back.
CONTINUED
217
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
Slide
11/01/14 18:31:50 31TK4630_223
Interior Convenience Items
Do not use the sun visor extension
feature over the rearview mirror.
Center Pocket
Sunglasses Holder
Instruments and Controls
Make sure to slide the sun visor
back to its original position before
flipping it back in place.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Push
Push
To open the center pocket, push on
the lid. It will unlatch and swing up.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
218
2012 TL
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the lid. It will unlatch and swing
down. To close it, push it until it
latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
11/01/14 18:31:58 31TK4630_224
Interior Convenience Items
Coat Hook
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Instruments and Controls
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
COAT HOOK
To use a coat hook, slide it out
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
219
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:32:15 31TK4630_225
Interior Lights
Light Control Buttons
FRONT
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
To turn off the setting, press the
OFF button.
FRONT
MAP LIGHT BUTTON
Instruments and Controls
OFF
REAR
Your vehicle has the light control
buttons on the front ceiling. With
these buttons, you can select three
positions: OFF, Door (door activated
position), and ON. To select a
position, press the appropriate
button.
When you press the DOOR button,
the green indicator in the button
comes on as a reminder.
Door (Door activated position):
The individual map lights in the
front and rear come on when any
door is opened, when the remote
transmitter (the keyless access
remote on models with keyless
access system) is used to unlock
the doors. When the doors are
closed, each light can be turned on
and off by pushing the map light
button (
/
).
After all doors are closed tightly, the
lights dim slightly, then fade out in
about 30 seconds.
OFF position:
The front individual map lights
can be turned on and off by
pressing each map light button
(
/
).
The rear individual map lights
cannot be turned on.
220
2012 TL
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
page 121.
With any door left open, the
lights stay on about 15 minutes,
then go out.
11/01/14 18:32:26 31TK4630_226
Interior Lights
On models without keyless access
system
The lights also come on when the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
FRONT
On models with keyless access system
The lights also come on when the
power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
ON position:
All the individual map lights come
on and stay on.
REAR
Turn on the front individual map
lights by pushing each map light
button (
/
). Push the
button again to turn it off. When the
door activated position is selected
with the light control button, the rear
map lights can be turned on by
pushing each map light button
(
/
). Push the button
again to turn it off.
221
2012 TL
Instruments and Controls
If any map light is left on when the
ignition switch is turned off or the
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode is set,
and all doors are closed, it will turn
off when the vehicle is locked with
the remote transmitter (the keyless
access remote on models with
keyless access system), or after
30 minutes.
Individual Map Lights
11/01/14 18:32:35 31TK4630_227
Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy light in each front door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Instruments and Controls
In addition to the courtesy lights on
the ceiling, the driver’s ambient foot
light comes on.
On models without
keyless access system
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comes on when you open the driver’s
door. It fades out in about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights come on when
the parking lights are turned on. To
adjust its brightness, press either of
the instrument panel brightness
control buttons (+ or −) with the
ignition switch* in the ON (II)
position.
222
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 18:32:44 31TK4630_228
Interior Lights
Keyless Access Remote Slot Light
On models with Keyless
Access System
Set the vehicle mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Instruments and Controls
Remove the keyless access remote
from the keyless access remote
slot.
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds (depending on the
interior light dimming timer setting).
The light turns off before 30 seconds
have elapsed if you lock the driver’s
door.
LIGHTS
Your vehicle has a keyless access
remote slot light. The light comes on
when you:
Open any door.
223
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:32:45 31TK4630_229
224
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:32:53 31TK4630_230
Features
Dual Temperature and Mode
Control .................................... 232
Climate Control Sensors ........... 234
Audio System ................................. 235
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Audio System ................................. 236
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 237
Playing the XM Radio ................. 246
Playing Discs .................................. 253
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 263
Playing an iPod ............................. 264
iPod Error Messages .................. 271
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 272
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 280
Bluetooth Audio System .............. 281
Climate Control System ................ 226
Using Automatic Climate
Control .................................... 228
Audio System ................................. 285
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 286
Playing the XM Radio ................. 299
Playing a Disc ................................. 307
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 319
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)
Audio ........................................... 320
Playing an iPod ............................. 354
Models without navigation system
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
Models with navigation system
iPod Error Messages .................. 363
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 364
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 375
Bluetooth Audio System .............. 376
Protecting Your Discs ................... 381
AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 385
Remote Audio Controls................. 387
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 389
Radio Theft Protection.................. 390
Setting the Clock ........................... 391
Security System ............................. 395
Compass.......................................... 397
Cruise Control ................................ 401
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 404
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models without navigation
system) ................................... 407
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models with navigation
system) ................................... 424
AcuraLink (U.S. models only) ... 449
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 465
225
2012 TL
Features
The climate control system in your
vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all weather
conditions.
11/01/17 13:13:10 31TK4630_231
Climate Control System
Models without navigation system
DRIVER’S SIDE DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE DISPLAY
Features
PASSENGER’S SIDE AUTO
BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST
BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
226
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:33:05 31TK4630_232
Climate Control System
Models with navigation system
DRIVER’S SIDE DISPLAY
CENTER
DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST
BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
227
2012 TL
Features
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
11/01/14 18:33:17 31TK4630_233
Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On models with navigation system
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated using
the voice control system. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
Features
Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote transmitter (keyless
access remote on models with
navigation system), the driver’s ID
(Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected,
and the climate control settings are
turned to the respective mode
automatically with the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position, or the
power mode ON.
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select, and to remove moisture
from the air and make the interior
dry. The system also adjusts the fan
speed and airflow levels.
1. Press the Driver’s or Passenger’s
AUTO button. You will see AUTO
and the selected temperature on
the appropriate side of the display
(in the center display on models
with navigation system).
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control switch.
You can set the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s
side temperature separately.
228
2012 TL
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference. The system also
dehumidifies the interior.
Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature and
the passenger’s side temperature can
be set separately. Push up the switch
of the appropriate temperature
control to increase the temperature
of airflow. Push down the switch to
decrease it. Each set temperature is
shown in the display (in the center
display on models with navigation
system).
11/01/14 18:33:32 31TK4630_234
Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
You can also select the appropriate
mode on the driver’s side and the
passenger’s side separately. To
change a mode, press and release
the appropriate side mode control
button. This will take the mode
control out of AUTO mode.
On models with navigation system
SYNC Button
When you press this button, the
indicator in the button comes on, and
the passenger’s side temperature
and mode control is synchronized to
the driver’s side set temperature and
mode control. Changing the
passenger’s side temperature or
mode control makes the indicator go
off and takes the system out of
SYNC mode.
ON/OFF Button
Each time you press this button, the
climate control system switches
between on and off. Turning on the
system with this button selects your
last climate control selection.
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior
temperature is independently
regulated for the driver and front
passenger according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
based on the information of the
sunlight sensor and the sun’s
229
2012 TL
Features
When you adjust a fan control, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
position which is updated
automatically by the navigation’s
global positioning system (GPS). If
one side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system lowers the
temperature only on that side.
11/01/14 18:33:47 31TK4630_235
Climate Control System
Features
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Fan Control
Press the
button to increase the
fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display
(in the center display on models with
navigation system).
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
230
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:34:06 31TK4630_236
Climate Control System
Air flows from the floor
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 145 ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
back of the center console, and the
floor vents.
The driver’s side mode and the
passenger’s side mode can be
selected separately. Use the
appropriate mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard,
and the vents on the back of the
center console.
Each time you press the mode
control button, the display shows the
mode selected.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, the fan speed
automatically increases. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel on the side of each corner
vent.
Select
window.
to help clear the rear
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
This mode can only be selected from
the driver’s side, however the
passenger’s side controls can still
change the temperature.
CONTINUED
231
2012 TL
Features
Mode Controls
Windshield Defroster Button
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
11/01/14 18:34:14 31TK4630_237
Climate Control System
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Features
When the indicator in the
button is on, the SYNC
indicator also comes on. The front
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.
Dual Temperature
and Mode Control
Your vehicle has two temperature
control switches and two mode
control buttons, one for the driver,
and one for the front passenger.
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE
MODE CONTROL
BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side temperature and mode can be
controlled independently.
U.S. model with navigation system is shown.
232
2012 TL
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
PASSENGER’S
SIDE MODE
CONTROL
BUTTON
11/01/14 18:34:23 31TK4630_238
Climate Control System
Synchronized Control
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
Features
The selected temperatures and
mode appear in the display (in the
center display on models with
navigation system). When the
indicator in the SYNC button is on,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature and mode by
pushing the driver’s side
temperature and mode controls.
When you set the temperature to its
upper or lower limit, it is displayed as
or
.
REAR FLOOR AIR DUCTS
233
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:34:33 31TK4630_239
Climate Control System
Rear Ventilation
The airflow from the rear vents can
be adjusted when either AUTO
mode (driver or passenger) is
selected or the fan mode is in the
or
position.
Climate Control Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Features
You can adjust the direction of the
airflow by moving the tab on each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also open or close the vents
with the dial between them.
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
234
2012 TL
The humidity sensor helps reduce
window fogging and also monitors
and adjusts cabin humidity by
automatically changing the mode to
Defrost.
11/01/17 13:13:17 31TK4630_240
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
Models Without navigation system
Models With navigation system
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 236 through 284 .
Features
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 285 through 380 .
235
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:34:54 31TK4630_241
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Selector Knob
SETUP BUTTON
Features
RETURN
BUTTON
SELECTOR
KNOB
Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, or to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector (ENTER) to go to that
selection.
When the audio system is in XM
Radio mode or playing discs, pushing
the selector (ENTER) knob switches
the display between the normal
display and the extended display.
The extended display has three
segments to display the detailed
information.
236
2012 TL
SETUP Display
To select any setting such as the
clock or sound adjustment, press the
SETUP button. To use any audio
system function, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. You can select the
item by turning the selector knob.
To go back to the previous display,
press the RETURN button.
Pressing the SETUP button
again will also cancel the setup
display mode.
Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote transmitter and turn the
audio system on with the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II) position, the driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio presets and sound level
settings (see page 243 ) are turned to
the respective memorized mode
automatically.
11/01/17 13:13:23 31TK4630_242
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
DISPLAY
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
(SOUND) BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
237
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:35:15 31TK4630_243
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
VOL/
(power/volume) knob or
the AM/FM button. Adjust the
volume by turning the VOL/
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see
page 240 .
TUNE − Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
238
2012 TL
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
11/01/14 18:35:28 31TK4630_244
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
3. Pick a preset button, then press
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
page 385 .
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
CONTINUED
239
2012 TL
Features
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
11/01/14 18:35:38 31TK4630_245
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
AUTO SELECT
To start the auto select mode, press
the selector knob (ENTER) to select
‘‘PUSH TO START.’’
Features
To cancel the auto select mode,
press the A. SEL (auto select) button,
or press the SETUP button to show
‘‘AUTO SELECT,’’ then press the
selector knob (ENTER). When you
see ‘‘PUSH TO CANCEL,’’ press
ENTER again.
You can also select the auto select
mode by using the SETUP button
and the selector knob. Push the
SETUP button to display the menu
items, then turn the selector knob to
select ‘‘AUTO SELECT.’’ Press the
selector knob (ENTER) to set the
selection.
240
2012 TL
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
RDS INFO Display
The RDS information display
function shows the name of the RDS
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
11/01/14 18:35:49 31TK4630_246
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the RDS information display
function on.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
RDS CATEGORY
Features
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS NAME OFF.’’
RDS INFO DISPLAY ON
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
display shows the station name.
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side (− or +) of the CATEGORY
bar to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows:
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
CONTINUED
241
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:36:06 31TK4630_247
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar to select an RDS category. The
display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations in the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
RDS Program Search
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
242
2012 TL
RDS Program SCAN
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
11/01/14 18:36:18 31TK4630_248
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display
function is off.
Adjusting the Sound
Selector knob adjustable
direction is shown.
FADER is selectable.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
Press the SETUP button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
BALANCE, CENTER, SUBW
(subwoofer), Dolby PL (Prologic) II,
and SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
(ENTER) knob to enter the setting,
then turn the selector knob to adjust
the setting.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
CONTINUED
243
2012 TL
Features
SUBWOOFER is selectable.
11/01/14 18:36:29 31TK4630_249
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
CENTER − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the center speaker.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
SUBW − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the subwoofer speaker.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
Features
If the fader adjustment is set to F9
(maximum front level), the
subwoofer is turned off.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
be activated when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.
Except SVC adjustment
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
To return to normal play, push the
RETURN or SETUP button.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, MLP Lossless and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
244
2012 TL
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
11/01/14 18:36:34 31TK4630_250
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons (+ or −)
to adjust the illumination of the audio
system (see page 143 ). The audio
system illuminates when the parking
lights are on, even if the radio is
turned off.
245
2012 TL
11/01/17 13:13:28 31TK4630_251
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
DISPLAY
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
XM RADIO BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
246
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:36:53 31TK4630_252
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
VOL/
knob.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
You can also change the mode from
the menu items. Press the SETUP
button to display the menu items,
then turn the selector knob to select
MODE/CATEGORY or MODE/
CHANNEL and press the selector
knob (ENTER). Each time you press
and release the selector knob
(ENTER), the display changes
between CHANNEL and
CATEGORY. To enter the setting,
press the TITLE button.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes in
the following sequence: name, title,
and category.
CONTINUED
247
2012 TL
Features
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
11/01/14 18:37:01 31TK4630_253
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.
TUNE − Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
Features
Channel list is shown.
You can also select a channel or
category from the list by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.
248
2012 TL
SCAN − The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
11/01/14 18:37:16 31TK4630_254
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
button again.
5. Press the
The other XM band will show.
Store the next six channels using
steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
2. Use the selector knob, or the
CATEGORY bar or SCAN button
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
CONTINUED
249
2012 TL
Features
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
11/01/14 18:37:28 31TK4630_255
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
Features
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
250
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:37:35 31TK4630_256
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
When DPLII is turned on (see page
244 ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the
compression of the music being
broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this
happens.
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
Features
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
251
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:37:43 31TK4630_257
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
252
2012 TL
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ will
appear in the display, and you’ll be
able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact
XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM
CANADA .
11/01/17 13:13:34 31TK4630_258
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
DISC SLOT
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
DISC LOAD BUTTON
CD BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
253
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:37:59 31TK4630_259
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
Features
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. The disc and track numbers,
and the elapsed time are shown in
the display. You can also select the
displayed information with the
TITLE button (see page 256 ). The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA format. When playing
a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in
the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear in the display. The disc,
folder and track numbers are
displayed. You can select up to 255
folders or tracks.
254
2012 TL
A disc compressed in AAC format
cannot be played in this audio
system.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
11/01/14 18:38:10 31TK4630_260
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
Loading Discs
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holds up to six discs.
2. The disc number for an empty
position begins blinking.
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see ‘‘DISC
READ’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.
4. When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
CONTINUED
255
2012 TL
Features
1. To load more than one disc, press
the LOAD button until you hear a
beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the
display. To load only one disc,
press and release the LOAD
button.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this unit.
11/01/14 18:38:24 31TK4630_261
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
Features
If you select name off, the text
display is turned off.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 32 characters of the text data.
If you press and hold the TITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
256
2012 TL
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the TITLE button.
11/01/14 18:38:36 31TK4630_262
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Use the SKIP bar while a disc is
playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode).
To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page 255 ).
Track Selection
Press ENTER.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also
select a folder or track/file from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob (ENTER) to
switch the display to the list
displayed with three segments, then
turn the knob to select a folder.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
change the display to the track/file
list, then turn the same knob to
select a track/file. Press the selector
knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
CONTINUED
257
2012 TL
Features
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
CATEGORY bar to select folders on
the disc and use either side of the
SKIP bar to change files.
Folder Selection
11/01/14 18:38:43 31TK4630_263
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode
Features
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side (+ or −) of the CATEGORY
bar to move to the beginning of the
next folder. Press the + side to skip
to the next folder, and press the −
side to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
To Select Repeat,
Random or Scan Mode:
MENU ITEMS
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
258
2012 TL
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.
11/01/14 18:38:53 31TK4630_264
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
REPEAT ONE TRK − To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode), select
REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu
items. You will see REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn
it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode
To cancel the selected repeat,
random, or scan mode, press the
SETUP button to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press the selector
knob (ENTER). When you see
‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’
press ENTER again.
REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD
from the menu items. You will see
F-REPEAT in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current folder. Select normal play to
turn it off. Selecting a different
folder with the CATEGORY bar also
turns off the repeat feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
RANDOM IN FLD − This feature,
when activated, plays the files within
the current folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed in MP3 or WMA. To
activate folder random play, select
RANDOM IN FLD from the menu
items. You will see F-RANDOM in
the display. The system will then
select and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random play by selecting normal play,
or you select a different folder with
the CATEGORY bar.
CONTINUED
259
2012 TL
Features
PLAY MODE ITEMS
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off the repeat feature.
REPEAT DISC − This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To activate disc repeat, select
REPEAT DISC from the menu items.
You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play
to turn it off.
11/01/14 18:38:59 31TK4630_265
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Features
RANDOM IN DISC − This feature
plays the tracks within a disc (the
files in MP3 or WMA mode) in
random order. To activate random
play, select RANDOM IN DISC from
the menu items. You will see
RANDOM in the display. Select
normal play to return to normal play.
SCAN TRK − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 258 ).
260
2012 TL
In MP3 or WMA mode
SCAN FLD − This function
samples the first file in each folder
on the disc in the order they are
stored. To activate the folder scan
feature, press and release the SCAN
button repeatedly. You will see
F-SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of the first file in
each folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of the folder
scan mode and play the last file
sampled.
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 258 ).
11/01/14 18:39:11 31TK4630_266
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar,
or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the CATEGORY bar) turns off the
SCAN or F-SCAN feature.
Each time you press and release
the SCAN button, the mode
changes from scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the
disc, but do not remove it from the
slot, the system will automatically
reload the disc after 10
seconds and begin playing.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the first disc begins
to eject.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
You can also select the disc scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 258 ).
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM or
button. Press the AUX button
to switch to an appropriate audio unit
(if it is connected to the auxiliary
input jack or the USB adapter cable).
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc changer.
CONTINUED
261
2012 TL
Features
SCAN DISC − This feature, when
activated, samples the first track on
each disc in order (the first file in
the main folder on each disc in MP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
D-SCAN shows in the display. The
system will then play the first track/
file in the first main folder on the
first disc for about 10 seconds. If you
do nothing, the system will then play
the following first track/file for 10
seconds each. When it plays a track/
file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.
When the first track on the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
on the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or selecting a different folder with
the CATEGORY bar also turns off
the scan feature.
11/01/14 18:39:20 31TK4630_267
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
Features
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the VOL/
knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM Radio).
To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
262
2012 TL
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 381 .
11/01/14 18:39:30 31TK4630_268
Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
Error Message
High Temperature
HEAT ERROR
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC LOAD
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
CHECK DISC
EJECT
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 382). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Servo Error
Disc Error
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 382).
263
2012 TL
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 382 .
Cause
11/01/17 13:13:38 31TK4630_269
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
USB INDICATOR
iPod INDICATOR
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
264
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:39:49 31TK4630_270
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod models confirmed to be
compatible with your audio system
using the USB adapter cable are:
Model
iPod classic (80/160 G)
iPod classic (120 G)
iPod with video (iPod 5th generation)
iPod nano
iPod nano 2nd generation
iPod nano 3rd generation
iPod nano 4th generation
iPod nano 5th generation
iPod touch
iPod touch 2nd generation
This system may not work with all
software versions of these devices.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
CONTINUED
265
2012 TL
Features
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
charged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
11/01/14 18:39:58 31TK4630_271
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Connecting an iPod
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Features
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
266
2012 TL
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
11/01/14 18:40:12 31TK4630_272
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
The display shows up to 16
characters (including spaces) of the
selected data. If the text data has
more than 16 characters, you will see
the first 16 characters and the
indicator in the display. Press
and hold the TITLE button until the
next 16 characters are shown.
To Select a File from iPod Menu
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.
Push ENTER.
Features
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button the display mode switches
between the album name, the song
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs, by using
the selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to an iPod menu, then turn the
selector knob to select a desired list.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
CONTINUED
267
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:40:24 31TK4630_273
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:
MENU ITEMS
Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: normal play, shuffle off,
shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off,
or repeat one track, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
PLAY MODE ITEMS
Features
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press ENTER
to set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
on the selected list are played.
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the SETUP button cancels
this setting mode.
You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle mode by using the SETUP
button and the selector knob. Press
the SETUP button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ Press
ENTER to set the selection.
268
2012 TL
To cancel the selected mode, press
the SETUP button and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.
11/01/14 18:40:36 31TK4630_274
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
REPEAT OFF − This feature turns
off the repeat mode.
SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums
or songs) in random order. The files
in each album are played in the
recorded order. You will see ALB
SHUF in the display.
Select the normal play mode or
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this
feature.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or turning the selector knob changes
the file while keeping the repeat
feature.
REPEAT ONE TRK − This
feature continuously plays a file. You
will see REPEAT in the display.
Select normal play or REPEAT OFF
to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or turning the selector knob changes
a file while keeping the shuffle
function.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
269
2012 TL
Features
SHUFFLE OFF − This feature
turns off either of the shuffle modes
(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE
ALBUM).
SHUFFLE ALL − This feature
plays all available files in a selected
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order.
You will see SHUFFLE in the display.
Select the normal play mode or
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this
feature.
11/01/14 18:40:46 31TK4630_275
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio, press the AM/FM,
or
button. Press the CD button
to switch to the disc mode (if a disc
is loaded). Press the AUX button to
switch the audio mode between the
Bluetooth audio and iPod.
Features
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
* : The displayed message may vary on models
or versions. On some models, there is
no message to disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
270
2012 TL
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 271 .
11/01/14 18:40:52 31TK4630_276
iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing
an iPod, find the solution in the
chart to the right. If you cannot
clear the error message, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message
Cause
USB ROM Error
UNSUPPORTED
VER.
Use of unsupported
iPod
CONNECT RETRY
Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected.
No files in iPod
Recognition failure of
iPod
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.
Features
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
iPod NO SONG
Solution
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
connected. See page 265 for specification
information on iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
271
2012 TL
11/01/17 13:15:36 31TK4630_277
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
FILE TYPE INDICATOR
USB INDICATOR
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
272
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:41:13 31TK4630_278
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
*: Only AAC format files recorded with
iTunes are playable on this audio unit.
CONTINUED
273
2012 TL
Features
To Play a USB
Flash Memory Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the disc player. To
play a USB flash memory device,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment, then
press the AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
11/01/14 18:41:21 31TK4630_279
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Features
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
274
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:41:32 31TK4630_280
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Connecting a
USB Flash Memory Device
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display mode shows you
in sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
CONTINUED
275
2012 TL
Features
USB ADAPTER CABLE
The display shows up to 16
characters (including spaces) of the
selected data. If the text data has
more than 16 characters, you will see
the first 16 characters and the
indicator in the display. Press
and hold the TITLE button until the
next 16 characters are shown.
11/01/14 18:41:44 31TK4630_281
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
Features
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to
skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
To Select a File from Folder
and File Lists
Folder Selection
Press ENTER.
Track Selection
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the selector
knob. Push the selector knob
(ENTER) to switch the display to the
folder list, then turn the selector
knob to select a folder. Press
ENTER to change the display to the
file list, then turn the same knob to
select a file. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.
276
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:41:54 31TK4630_282
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the SETUP button cancels
this setting mode.
To Select Repeat, Random or
Scan Mode:
MENU ITEMS
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.
Features
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press
the SETUP button and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.
CONTINUED
277
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:42:03 31TK4630_283
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
PLAY MODE ITEMS
REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature
replays all the files on the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
Select normal play to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY bar also turns off this
feature.
Features
RANDOM IN FLD − This feature
plays the files in the selected folder
in random order. You will see
F-RANDOM in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.
REPEAT ONE TRK − This
feature continuously plays a file.
Select normal play to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off this feature.
RANDOM IN DISC − This feature
plays all the files in random order.
You will see RANDOM in the display.
Select normal play to turn it off.
278
2012 TL
SCAN TRK − This function
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, press
and release the SCAN button. You
will see SCAN in the display. You will
get a 10 second sampling of each file
in the folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of the scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 277 ).
11/01/14 18:42:15 31TK4630_284
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 277 ).
Select normal play to turn either
scan feature off. Pressing either side
of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also
turns off the feature.
To Stop Playing a USB
Flash Memory Device
To change modes, press the AM/
FM or
button. Press the CD
button to switch to the disc mode (if
a disc is loaded). Press the AUX
button to switch the audio mode
between the USB or Bluetooth
Audio.
USB Flash Memory
Device Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 280 .
Features
SCAN FLD − This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press and release the SCAN button
repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first file in each
folder. Press and hold the SCAN
button to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
Disconnecting a
USB Flash Memory Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.
279
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:42:21 31TK4630_285
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message
Features
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
UNPLAYABLE FILE
USB NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
Cause
USB ROM Error
Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected.
Use of unsupported
files
No files in USB flash
memory device
Use of unsupported
USB flash memory
device
280
2012 TL
Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 273 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
11/01/17 13:15:41 31TK4630_286
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
Features
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
281
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:42:39 31TK4630_287
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 412 ).
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by
calling the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
NOTE: In some states, provinces,
and territories, it may be illegal to
perform some data device functions
while driving.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
is recognized, then the system
begins to play.
After a device is linked, press the
TITLE button to confirm the device
name. The name of the device will
appear on the audio display.
If more than one phone is paired
to the HFL system, there will be
a delay before the system begins
to play.
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
Press the AUX button* with the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. The audio
display shows the Bluetooth Audio
message and mark. Until the phone
is recognized, you will see ‘‘NO
CONNECT’’ on the display. This
message will go off when the phone
282
2012 TL
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
* : If an iPod, USB flash memory device, or
audio unit connected to the auxiliary input
jack was selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB, or AUX in the audio
display. Push the AUX button again to
to play audio files from your Bluetooth
Audio phone.
11/01/14 18:42:57 31TK4630_288
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
To pause or resume a file
To change sound settings
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily. Press the
SETUP button to display the audio
settings.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Features
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
To skip a file
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
NOTE: The skip function may not be
available on some phone devices.
Turn the selector to select
RESUME/PAUSE mode, then press
ENTER to set your selection. Repeat
to resume play.
Press the SETUP button to display
the audio settings. Turn the selector
to select a desired sound mode, then
press ENTER to set your selection.
Turn the selector to your liking (see
page 243 for more sound setting
information).
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
CONTINUED
283
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:43:10 31TK4630_289
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To switch to HFL mode
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
HFL Talk button on the steering
wheel. The display switches to the
HFL mode (see page 408 ).
Features
After ending the call, press the HFL
Back button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
If you receive a call while the system
is in the pause mode, the mode will
be canceled and Bluetooth Audio
will continue to play.
To turn off the
Bluetooth Audio mode
Select any other audio mode by
pressing a button: AM/FM,
or CD (if a disc is loaded),
on the audio control panel, or press
the mode button on the steering
wheel to select another audio mode.
If an iPod or USB flash memory
device is connected to the USB
adapter cable, or audio unit is
connected to AUX jack, pressing the
AUX button also changes the mode.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
284
2012 TL
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
11/01/14 18:43:20 31TK4630_290
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a dial and a selector.
Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
DIAL
ENTER
The dial turns left and right. Use it to
make selections or adjustments to a
list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
press ENTER to go to that selection.
285
2012 TL
Features
SELECTOR
Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote and turn the audio
system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio presets and sound level
settings (see page 296 ) are turned to
the respective memorized mode
automatically.
11/01/14 18:43:29 31TK4630_291
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
(SOUND) BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
286
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:43:42 31TK4630_292
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
STEREO INDICATOR
BAND
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
center display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see
page 290 .
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
CONTINUED
287
2012 TL
Features
The power mode must be in
ACCESSORY or ON. Press the
AUDIO button to view the audio
control display. Turn the system on
by pressing the VOL/
knob or
the AM/FM button. Adjust the
volume by turning the
VOL/
knob.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
11/01/14 18:43:50 31TK4630_293
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
interface selector, then push the
interface selector up to go back.
SCAN
Features
SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
To activate it, press either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar,
then release it.
TUNE
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the
side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, or the
side to tune to a lower
frequency. To tune with the
interface dial, push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to select Tune. Then press
ENTER on the interface selector,
and turn the interface dial to the
desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN side of
the SCAN A.SEL bar, then release it.
To scan with the interface dial,
push the interface selector down,
and turn the interface dial to select
Scan, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
288
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:44:01 31TK4630_294
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it until you hear a beep.
Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
A.SEL INDICATOR
Features
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds. If you
do nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the bar again.
A.SEL
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
To store a preset memory location:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
2. Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or
RDS function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
CONTINUED
289
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:44:12 31TK4630_295
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select ON, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the center display and the
audio control display (if selected),
and the system goes into auto select
mode for several seconds.
You can also press the A.SEL side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
A.SEL on the center display or the
screen, and the system goes into
auto select mode for several seconds.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
To cancel auto select, select A.Sel on
the audio menu again and turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL OFF,
or press the A.SEL side of the bar
again. This restores the presets you
originally set.
The RDS INFO display function
shows the name of the station you
are listening to. With the audio
system on and the FM band selected,
you can turn this function on or off.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 385 .
The system stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons (icons).
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button (icon).
290
2012 TL
RDS INFO Display
11/01/14 18:44:23 31TK4630_296
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
RDS INFO MESSAGE
To switch the RDS INFO display
function on and off, press and
release the TITLE button. With the
system on, you will see the ‘‘RDS
INFO ON’’ message on the center
display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
NOTE: If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
audio screen will always display the
RDS information.
Features
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘RDS INFO
OFF.’’
RDS SEARCH
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button
to display the radio information
on the screen. Push down the
interface selector, then turn the
interface dial to select RDS search.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
The principal RDS categories are
shown as follows:
CONTINUED
291
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:44:38 31TK4630_297
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
ALL: All RDS category stations
COUNTRY: Country music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
Features
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
JAZZ: Jazz
RDS CATEGORY
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
CLASSIC: Classical music
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
RDS CATEGORY
Turn the interface dial to select an
RDS category. You can use the
search or scan function to find radio
stations on the selected RDS
category by pressing the interface
selector to the left or the right.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
If you do nothing while the
RDS category is selected, the
selected category is canceled.
292
2012 TL
You can also select an RDS category
with the CATEGORY bar. Press
either side (+ or −) of the
CATEGORY bar to display an RDS
category in the center display. Select
a category by pressing either side of
the bar.
11/01/14 18:44:47 31TK4630_298
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category Search
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or right to select SEEK up,
SEEK down, or SCAN in the upper
right corner of the screen. Press
ENTER to activate the RDS category
search (SEEK up/down).
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.
To activate RDS category search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the interface selector down,
and turn the interface dial to select
RDS search. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. The screen shows
you the RDS category list.
CONTINUED
293
2012 TL
Features
This function searches up and down
for strong signal frequencies that
carry the selected RDS category
information. This can help you to
find a station in your favorite
category. To activate it, press and
release either side (
or
) of
the SKIP bar. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
searching it.
11/01/14 18:44:55 31TK4630_299
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category SCAN
Features
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category one by one.
To activate it, press and release the
SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar.
You will see SCAN in the center
display. The system will scan for a
station with a strong signal in the
selected RDS category. You will also
see the selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
scanning it. When the system finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.
To activate RDS category scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
interface selector down, and turn the
interface dial to select RDS search
on the audio menu. Press ENTER on
the interface selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
294
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:45:04 31TK4630_300
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
TEXT INDICATOR
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.
Features
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or the right to select SCAN.
Then press ENTER to activate the
RDS SCAN.
Radio Text Display
This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
READ RADIO TEXT
To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to select Read Radio Text. Press
ENTER on the interface selector to
enter the setting.
CONTINUED
295
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:45:13 31TK4630_301
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and
BALANCE are each adjustable. You
can also adjust the strength of the
sound coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made with
the
(Sound) button or the
interface dial.
SOUND SETUP
To adjust the sound, press the
AUDIO button, push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to Sound Setup. Then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The display shows up to 64
characters on the selected RDS
station.
296
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:45:28 31TK4630_302
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the VOL/
knob or
interface knob to adjust the setting
to your liking. You can check the
level on the navigation screen or on
the center display. When the level
reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’
in the center display.
Select the mode you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial then
press ENTER.
If you do not make an adjustment
within 10 seconds, you will need to
select the mode again.
You can also adjust the sound by
pushing the
(Sound) button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown
in the center display as you push
the button.
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface dial or VOL/
knob to
the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector.
If the fader adjustment is set to F9
(maximum front level), the
subwoofer is turned off.
CONTINUED
297
2012 TL
Features
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 10 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface dial or VOL/
knob
to the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector. To equalize the
fader or balance, turn the interface
dial or VOL/
knob until the
marks on the sound grid come to the
center of the adjustment bar.
11/01/14 18:45:38 31TK4630_303
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
CENTER − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the center speaker.
Features
SUBWOOFER − To adjust the
strength of the sound from the
subwoofer speaker, select it and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: OFF,
LOW, MID, and HIGH. The default
setting is MID. To change the SVC
mode, select SVC, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The current setting is shown on the
screen. Turn the interface
dial to the desired level, and enter
your selection by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
activate when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XM
Radio, AUX (USB, iPod , AUX,
Bluetooth Audio), and HDD Audio.
When ProLogic II is available, ‘‘PL
II’’ is shown in the audio display.
When ProLogic II is not available in
the selected audio source, ‘‘DPL2 N/
A’’ is shown on the center display.
298
2012 TL
To set this feature on or off, select
Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Rotate the
interface dial to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, MLP Lossless and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
NOTE: In some audio playing modes
(XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the
music coming from the rear
speakers may sound distorted. This
is due to compression of the music,
and it does not indicate a problem
with the setting.
11/01/14 18:45:46 31TK4630_304
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
(SOUND) BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
XM RADIO BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
TUNE BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
299
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:45:55 31TK4630_305
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channel in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of
music, XM Radio also allows
you to view channel and category
selections in the audio display.
Operating the XM Radio
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
Each time you push the interface
selector up, the band will change to
XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO
button to display XM information on
the screen. You can operate the XM
radio system with the interface dial.
To listen to XM Radio, set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or ON. Push
the
button to select the XM
Radio. The last channel you listened
to will show in the audio screen (if
selected) and the center display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
VOL/
knob.
300
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:46:08 31TK4630_306
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
push the interface selector down
to display AUDIO MENU, then
turn the interface dial to select
Mode, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
You can also switch the mode by
pressing the TITLE button for
3 seconds.
In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
On the screen, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
TUNE − Press either side of the
TUNE bar to change channel
selections. Press the
side of the
bar for higher numbered channels
and the
side for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector. Push down the interface
selector to select AUDIO MENU,
then turn the interface dial to choose
Tune and press ENTER on the
interface selector. Turn the interface
dial to the appropriate direction. In
the category mode, you can only
select channels within that category.
CHANNEL LIST − Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel List and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface dial to select a channel,
then press ENTER to set your
selection.
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the bar to select
another category.
CONTINUED
301
2012 TL
Features
Turn the interface dial to select CH
or CAT, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. Move the
interface selector up to go back.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
NAME (artist name), TITLE (music
title), and CHANNEL NAME
(channel name).
11/01/14 18:46:19 31TK4630_307
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the
category mode, only the
channels within that category are
scanned. To activate SCAN,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN
on the screen and center display.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
SCAN side of the bar to cancel.
CHANNEL SCAN − This function
samples all channels. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
XM BAND
CATEGORY SCAN − This
function samples the stations in the
selected category. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Category Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
302
2012 TL
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will be shown on
the display.
11/01/14 18:46:33 31TK4630_308
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
2. Use the tune, list, or scan function
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’ − There is
a problem with the XM antenna.
Please consult your dealer.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
CONTINUED
303
2012 TL
Features
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
11/01/14 18:46:43 31TK4630_309
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles
to the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
GROUND REPEATER
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
304
2012 TL
When DPLII is turned on (see page
298 ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the
compression of the music being
broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this
happens.
11/01/14 18:46:57 31TK4630_310
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
This function stores the sound
content played on the selected XM
Radio station with the channel,
category, name, and title information.
To activate this function, press and
hold the
button for about 2
seconds while a song or passage
which you want to store is playing.
You can record for up to 10 seconds.
To stop recording, press the AM/
FM button or
button.
Once you store the recorded sound
file, you can replay it and confirm the
information. The system can store
up to 30 sound files. If you continue
to store more files, the oldest one
will be deleted each time you add a
new file.
Features
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Note Function
U.S. models only
NOTE ICON
To replay and see the stored file,
press the AUDIO button to select
the audio display on the navigation
screen.
Push down the interface selector
to display the audio menu. Turn
the interface dial to select Note,
then press ENTER.
CONTINUED
305
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:47:07 31TK4630_311
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the power mode
in ACCESSORY or ON, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
SOUND FILE
RECORDED DATE
Turn the selector dial to select a
sound file, then press ENTER. The
display shows the category, name
and title information of the
selected file.
To delete all files, push the interface
selector to the left to select
‘‘DELETE ALL,’’ then press
ENTER. To delete one file, select
the file you want to delete
and push the interface selector
to the right, then press ENTER.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the +
side of the CATEGORY bar until ‘‘0’’
306
2012 TL
appears in the display. Your I.D. will
appear in the displays.
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, CAT
(category) or CH (channel) will
appear in the center display, and
you’ll be able to listen to XM Radio
broadcasts. XM Radio will continue
to send an activation signal to your
vehicle for at least 12 hours from the
activation request. If the service has
not been activated after 36 hours,
contact XM Radio. In Canada,
contact XM CANADA .
11/01/14 18:47:14 31TK4630_312
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER)KNOB
DISC SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
307
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:47:26 31TK4630_313
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc player. To operate the
disc player, the power mode must be
in the ACCESSORY or ON.
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
The disc player can also play MP3,
WMA, or AAC format that saved on
CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (see
page 313).
Features
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
NOTE:
If a file on WMA or AAC disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio
system skips to the next file.
The disc player can play these disc
formats:
DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
verification standards may not be
playable.
CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT)
Video CDs and DVD-V format discs
will not work in this unit.
CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC)
DVD-A
DVD-R/DVD-RW (MP3, WMA,
AAC)
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
308
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:47:35 31TK4630_314
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
It is possible to select up to 999 files
for inclusion in CD-Rs and CD-RWs,
and up to 3,500 files for inclusion in
DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.
To Load a Disc
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 381 .
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
309
2012 TL
Features
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks &
DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11/01/14 18:47:43 31TK4630_315
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
Select the disc player by pressing the
DISC button. The system will begin
playing the last selected track in the
disc. You will see the current track
position highlighted.
Features
Title information will be displayed in
a list when the information is found
in the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on the
built-in hard disk drive. When you
play a CD recorded with text data,
you will see the genre, artist name,
album and track name on the screen.
When you play MP3/WMA/AAC
discs, you will see the genre, artist
name, album name and track name
on the screen. If the disc was not
recorded with this information, it will
not be displayed.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the center display changes
from artist name to album name, to
track name and then to normal
display that shows the track number
and the elapsed time. When playing
a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the
display mode changes from folder
name, to file name, to artist tag, to
album tag, to track tag, and then to
normal display.
To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release the
side of the skip bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press the
side
again to skip to the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold either side of the skip bar.
When you insert a CD for the first
time, the system automatically starts
recording to the hard disc. For
information on recording from music
CDs, see page 322 .
When you insert a CD for the first
time, a Gracenote notification
appears. For more information, see
page 351 .
310
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:47:53 31TK4630_316
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Choose a Track
Track Repeat
TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF
icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Features
TRACK LIST
You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. If there are no track
names, you will see ‘‘No Title’’
displayed. Turn the interface dial to
select the desired track, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
TRACK REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
311
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:48:04 31TK4630_317
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Random Play
TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR
RANDOM OFF ICON
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Track Scan
Features
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF
icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
SCAN ICON
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This feature plays the tracks within a
disc in random order. When playing
MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all
the tracks within the disc are played
in random order, regardless of the
configuration of the folder.
The scan function samples all tracks
on the disc in the order they are
recorded on the disc.
To activate scan, press the SCAN
side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, or
push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Scan on the
AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Random on
the AUDIO MENU, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
312
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:48:15 31TK4630_318
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
Scan icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track on the
disc. When you return to disc mode,
the disc will begin playing from
where it left off.
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc
This audio system plays CD-ROM,
CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, and
DVD-R/RW compressed in MP3,
WMA, or AAC formats. You can
select up to 255 folders or tracks.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
Features
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar
again, or turn the interface dial to
select the OFF icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The system begins to play the last
track sampled.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the AM/FM button, the
button, or the HDD/AUX
button. To return to disc mode, press
the DISC button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the VOL/
knob or the engine start/stop
button, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the disc will begin playing where it
left off.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to turn
the power mode off, see page 184 .
CONTINUED
313
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:48:25 31TK4630_319
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
NOTE:
Combining a low sampling frequency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
Features
To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc,
use the disc controls previously
described, along with the following
information.
Changing the Folders
While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC
disc, you can select a folder within
the disc by pressing either side of
the category bar. Each time you
press either side of the bar, the
folder title and its first file’s
information appear on the center
display and on the navigation screen
in hierarchical order of the folders
which contain files within the disc.
Changing and Selecting
the Folders/Files
FOLDER LIST
Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the folders within a
disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/
AAC disc, push the interface selector
up. The folder list in the currently
playing disc will appear on the screen.
If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.
314
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:48:34 31TK4630_320
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Repeat
FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
select the folder repeat icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Features
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF
icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
FILE LIST
Select a desired folder by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
The display returns to normal play,
and the first track in the selected
folder begins to play.
To change a file, turn the interface
dial to select a desired file, then
press ENTER.
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
This feature, when activated,
replays all files on the
selected folder in the order they are
compressed. To activate folder
repeat play, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
315
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:48:46 31TK4630_321
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Random
FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
File Scan
Features
SCAN OFF ICON
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
This feature, when activated,
plays all files in the current folder
in random order. To activate
folder random play, push the
interface selector down while
playing a disc. Turn the interface
dial to select Random on the
AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface
dial to select the folder
random icon, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
FILE SCAN ICON
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This feature samples all files in the
selected folder in the order they are
stored. To activate this feature, press
the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL
bar. You can also select the SCAN
icon with the interface dial. Push the
selector down, turn the dial to select
316
2012 TL
Scan on the AUDIO MENU, then
press ENTER. Turn the dial to select
the scan icon, then press ENTER.
The system begins to play a file for
about 10 seconds, and continues to
sample the remaining files.
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN side of the bar again, or select
OFF icon by turning the dial, then
press ENTER.
11/01/14 18:48:53 31TK4630_322
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
NOTE:
When playing MP3, WMA or AAC
format disc, each time you press the
SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar,
the system changes in the following
sequence: Scan → Scan first track in
folder → OFF → Scan.
Features
Folder Scan
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar. Or, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select Scan
on the AUDIO MENU, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
folder scan icon, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The last track sampled
begins to play.
317
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:49:01 31TK4630_323
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Features
Removing a Disc from the Player
To remove the disc, press the eject
(
) button.
Playing a DVD-A Disc
Use the disc controls previously
described.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts
playing automatically.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 381 .
318
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:49:11 31TK4630_324
Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
center display while playing a disc.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC
CHECK DISC
LOAD
UNPLAYABLE
FILE
HEAT ERROR
Cause
Servo Error
Mechanical Error
Solution
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 382 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Features
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a disc,
press the eject button. After ejecting
the disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 382 .
Error Message
FOCUS Error
Disc violates copyright
Disc not supported
Load Error
Track/File format not
supported
High Temperature
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
319
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:49:18 31TK4630_325
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER)KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
HDD/AUX BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
320
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:49:28 31TK4630_326
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
NOTE:
Only recordings from a standard
CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo
PCM digital sound data) to HDD
are supported.
Music data recorded on HDD can
only be used for personal
enjoyment.
Data is recorded using ultraefficient compression technology,
therefore, sound quality may vary
slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed
when the information is found in
the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on
the built-in hard disk drive. See
page 351 .
Recording function from following
media is not supported.
−CD-DA which prohibits the
copying by SCMS
−CD-DA with copy control
−SACD (Super Audio CD)
Features
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
function can record tracks from
music CDs to the navigation system’s
hard disc. This function also allows
for various playing methods, such as
playing recorded tracks on an artistby-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For
example, you can play the tracks that
you want to listen to in any order
that you like for each playlist.
−DTS-CD
−DVD-A
−CD-R/RW
−DVD-R/RW
−Copy controlled CDs (Playback
cannot be guaranteed)
−DTS-CDs (Only enabled for
playback)
Digital music files, such as MP3,
WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R
and USB flash memory devices
cannot be copied to HDD.
Likewise, digital music files
recorded to HDD cannot be copied
to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all data
will be lost and stored music will not
be recovered.
321
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:49:43 31TK4630_327
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Playlists
Playlists are track lists in a certain
playback group.
Features
Original Playlist
This playlist is automatically
generated when the music CD is
recorded. The maximum number
of original playlists that can be
stored to the HDD is 999, with 99
songs on each playlist. Each album
name on the music CD is counted
as a playlist.
User Playlist
The HDD has six playlist folders for
user customizing. Each playlist can
be edited by the user, and will store
up to 999 songs. For more
information on how to edit the user
playlist, see page 328 .
Track Search Methods
Songs that have been recorded on
the HDD are categorized in groups
for easy searching.
There are six categories:
Album record date: Album titles are
arranged by date of recording.
Album: Album names are arranged
in alphabetical order.
Artist: Artist names are arranged in
alphabetical order.
Genre: Songs are arranged by genre.
Playlist: Any of six playlists that are
arranged by the user.
Track: Track titles are arranged in
alphabetical order.
For more information of how to
search a music, see page 329 .
322
2012 TL
Recording a Music
CD to HDD Audio
If you play a music CD that has not
yet been recorded on the HDD, the
system will automatically begin
recording to the HDD once the disc
is loaded. To turn this feature off,
see page 324 .
11/01/14 18:49:55 31TK4630_328
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
REC DONE ICON
NOTE:
Please note that there will be no
compensation offered in the case
of unsuccessful recording of audio
data or the loss of audio data due
to any cause whatsoever.
REC READY ICON
REC ICON
The icons show the recording
conditions for each track:
Rec icon: Now recording
Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded
Rec done icon: Recording finished
If you stop the engine or the
power system is turned off while
recording a CD, there may be
pauses between songs when you
play back from the HDD.
Tracks from music CDs are
recorded at four times the
playback speed. You can listen to
tracks as they are being recorded.
With the factory settings, all of the
songs on a music CD are
automatically recorded.
Recording settings cannot be
changed during recording.
If the number of songs in the
playlist exceeds 999, the oldest
song will be overwritten each time
you add a new song.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random
and scan functions are not
available during recording.
323
2012 TL
Features
During recording, operation of this
product may be slower.
You can listen to tracks from other
playlists that have already been
recorded while recording. Press
the HDD/AUX button and switch
over to HDD Audio.
11/01/14 18:50:06 31TK4630_329
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Cancel Recording a
Music CD to HDD
In order to suspend recording, push
the interface selector down, select
Cancel CD Recording, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Changing the Recording Settings
Recording a Track on a Music CD
Manually
Features
CD Recording ICON
Turn the dial to select CD Recording
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
HDD SETUP
To change the setting to manual
mode, push the interface selector
down on the HDD screen. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup
and press ENTER.
324
2012 TL
Turn the interface dial to select
MANUAL and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Push down the interface selector to
go back to the audio screen.
11/01/14 18:50:16 31TK4630_330
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Record a Track Manually
Recording All of the Tracks on a
Music CD Automatically
Record CD ICON
Select a track to record from the
music CD, push the HDD/AUX
button, then push the interface
selector down to display the audio
menu. Turn the interface dial to
select Record CD, and then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
To change the setting to
automatically record all of the tracks
on a music CD, move the interface
selector down on the HDD Audio
screen. Turn the interface dial to
select HDD Setup, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Playing Tracks on HDD
To play tracks on HDD, push the
HDD/AUX button until the HDD
Audio screen appears. Playback will
start automatically with the track
previously selected.
Turn the dial to select CD Recording
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
AUTO, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
325
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:50:29 31TK4630_331
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing a Track/Tracklist
To change a track or tracklist*, press
on the Category bar or the Skip bar.
Features
Category Bar
The next tracklist is selected.
If you press + during the last
+
tracklist, the first tracklist is
selected.
The previous tracklist is selected.
If you press − during the first
−
tracklist, the last tracklist is
selected.
* : The tracklist has six search mode categories:
albums, artists, tracks, playlists, genres, and
record date. Within the selected category, the
tracklist will be changed with the category bar.
Repeat Playback
Skip Bar
Returns to the beginning of the
song that is being played. Press
twice to play, the previous track. If
you press this bar during the first
song, the last song is selected.
The next song is selected. If you
press this bar during the last song,
the first song is selected.
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
To fast forward, press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the
side
of the SKIP bar.
REPEAT OFF ICON
REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the repeat icon, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
326
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:50:38 31TK4630_332
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF
icon, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Random Playback
RANDOM OFF ICON
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF
icon, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
RANDOM ICON
This function plays tracks in the
current search mode in random
order. To activate random play, push
the interface selector down during
track playback. Turn the interface
dial to select Random on the HDD
AUDIO MENU. Press ENTER on
the interface selector.
327
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:50:47 31TK4630_333
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
scan icon. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track in the
current search mode.
Scan Playback
Features
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon.
Press ENTER on the interface
selector to play the last track
sampled.
SCAN OFF ICON
SCAN ICON
This function samples the tracks in
the current search mode in the order
that they were recorded.
To activate scan, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select Scan
on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
328
2012 TL
Making an User Playlist
The HDD has two types of the
playlists: original playlist and user
playlist. On the original playlist, the
music CD is recorded automatically
when it is played. In addition, you
can create up to six user playlists on
the HDD. In each playlist, you can
store a desired music data from the
original playlists or music CDs.
11/01/14 18:50:56 31TK4630_334
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Adding a Track to a User Playlist
3. On the Playlists screen, turn the
interface dial and select the
Playlist to which the song is to be
added, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will be
returned to the Playback screen.
After storing music data, you can
customize the original and user
playlists (see page 337 ).
Searching the Music
While playing music in the HDD
playback screen, push the interface
selector up to select MUSIC
SEARCH. You can search a track by
albums, artists, tracks, playlists,
genres, or record date, or you can
shuffle all tracks.
2. The track options box is displayed.
Select Add to Playlist, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
329
2012 TL
Features
1. While a track is playing on an
Original Playlist or User Playlist
Playback screen, turn the
interface dial and select the track
that you want to add to a User
Playlist, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
11/01/14 18:51:07 31TK4630_335
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Album
ALPHABET TAG
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
Features
If you push the interface selector
down to select ‘‘PLAY SELECTED,’’
all available files on the selected item
are played. Press the AUDIO button
to go back to the Playback screen.
Push the selector down.
SHUFFLE ALL TRACKS
Shuffles the playback of all tracks
that have been recorded on HDD.
To shuffle all tracks, push the
interface selector up to display the
‘‘Search music by’’ screen, and then
push the interface selector down.
Shuffled playback begins.
Push the interface selector up to
display the ‘‘Search music by’’ screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Albums.’’ Press ENTER on the
selector, and the album list will be
displayed in alphabetical order.
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
330
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:51:19 31TK4630_336
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Artist
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
Searching Music by Track
Turn the interface dial to select the
artist you want to listen to, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
The first track on the selected artist
begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Artists.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the artist list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
If you push the interface selector
down to select ‘‘PLAY SELECTED,’’
all available files on the selected item
are played. Press the AUDIO button
to go back to the Playback screen.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Tracks.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the track list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
CONTINUED
331
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:51:28 31TK4630_337
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
Searching Music by Playlists
Features
Turn the interface dial to select a
track you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
playlist you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
The first track on the selected
playlist begins to play.
If you push the interface selector
down to select ‘‘PLAY SELECTED,’’
all available files on the selected item
are played. Press the AUDIO button
to go back to the Playback screen.
The selected track begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Playlists.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector then the playlist
will be displayed.
332
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:51:40 31TK4630_338
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Genre
The first track on the selected genre
begins to play.
Searching Music by Record Date
RECORDED DATE
Features
If you push the interface selector
down to select ‘‘PLAY SELECTED,’’
all available files on the selected item
are played. Press the AUDIO button
to go back to the Playback screen.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Genres.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the genre list
will be displayed.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Record Date. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. The album list will
be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the
genre you want to listen to, and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
CONTINUED
333
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:51:48 31TK4630_339
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
Searching Music by Voice
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
Features
You can set the Song By Voice
feature on or off. To change the
setting:
1. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup
and press ENTER.
334
2012 TL
2. Turn the dial to select Music
Search Setup and press ENTER.
11/01/14 18:52:01 31TK4630_340
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Modifying the Phonetics
Features
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Song By Voice, then press ENTER.
4. Turn the interface dial to select
ON or OFF, then press ENTER.
Push down the interface selector
to go back to the audio screen.
The phonetics can be modified on all
artists, songs and albums on the
HDD and iPod connected to the USB
connector cable.
1. Follow the steps 1 and 2 on page
334 to display Music Search Setup.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Phonetic Modification, then press
ENTER.
3. To set a new phonetic, turn the
dial to select
<New Modification>,
then press ENTER.
4. To edit a phonetic, turn the dial to
select an item on the list, then
press ENTER.
5. Turn the dial to select HDD or
iPod, then press ENTER.
CONTINUED
335
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:52:11 31TK4630_341
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Features
6. Turn the dial to select an item to
modify: Artist, Album or Song,
then press ENTER.
8. Turn the dial to select a mode:
Play to listen to the phonetic to
be set
7. Turn the dial to select an item on
the selected list.
Edit to modify the phonetic
Cancel
336
2012 TL
9. On the Enter a phonetic screen,
enter a new phonetic.
Select a letter by turning the dial,
then press ENTER.
11/01/14 18:52:21 31TK4630_342
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
10.After entering the phonetic, push
the interface selector down to
select OK.
EDIT ALBUM
Features
11.You will see the Phonetic
Modification List. Push the
interface selector down to select
OK to set your setting.
Customizing Original/User
Playlist
After storing the data, you can
change some items: order of tracks
on the user playlist, name of the
playlist, track title, artist name, and
music genre. You can also add a
track to the playlist, and delete the
track or the album from the playlist.
Adding an Original Playlist or User
Playlist to a Different User Playlist
1. While playing back an Original
Playlist or User Playlist that you
want to add to a different User
Playlist, push the interface
selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit an User Playlist), and
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
CONTINUED
337
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:52:30 31TK4630_343
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
3. On the Edit Album (or Edit
Playlist) screen, turn the interface
dial and select Add to Playlist, and
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Changing the Order of
Tracks within the User Playlist
Features
4. On the Playlist screen, turn the
interface dial and select a desired
User Playlist, then press ENTER
on the interface selector. You will
be returned to the Playback
screen for the Original Playlist or
User Playlist.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
the playlist, then press ENTER.
1. On the HDD audio screen, push
up the interface selector to select
MUSIC SEARCH. Select Playlist
by turning the interface dial, then
press ENTER.
338
2012 TL
3. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU for
the playlist.
11/01/14 18:52:42 31TK4630_344
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Playlist, then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Changing the Name of the Original
Playlist or User Playlist
To change user playlist name
5. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Order, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
Features
6. Turn the interface dial to select
the track to be moved, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
7. Turn the interface dial to select
where the track is to be moved,
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
8. Push the interface selector down
to return to the Playback screen of
the User Playlist.
To change original playlist name
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist name, or a desired
album to change the original
playlist name (album name). Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 329 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
CONTINUED
339
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:52:51 31TK4630_345
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
6. After inputting the name, push
the interface selector down to
select OK.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Playlist (or Edit Album to edit
Original Playlist), then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
7. The confirmation screen is
displayed. Confirm that the new
name is correct, and then
push the interface selector
down to select OK. You will be
returned to the Edit Album or
Edit Playlist screen for the
Original Playlist or User Playlist.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Playlist Name (or Edit Album
Name to edit Original Playlist),
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. On the Edit Album Name screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
5. On the Enter an album name
screen, input the new Original
Playlist name or User Playlist name.
Select a letter by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
340
2012 TL
8. Push the selector down to
select OK. The screen
returns to the playlist.
11/01/14 18:53:01 31TK4630_346
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Track Titles
Features
1. Select a desired playlist, then turn
the interface dial to select the
track of which you want to change
the name, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. Refer to the
Music Search function on page
329 for how to select a playlist.
OPTIONS ICON
2. The OPTIONS icon will appear in
the selected track. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
3. The track options box is displayed.
Select Edit Track Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. On the Edit Track screen, turn the
interface dial and select Edit
Track Name, then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
341
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:53:12 31TK4630_347
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. On the Edit Track Name screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Edit Track, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
6. Input the new track name on the
Enter a track name screen.
Features
NOTE:
After selecting the track for which
you want to change the track title,
you can also push the interface
selector down to display the AUDIO
MENU, and then select Edit Track.
The subsequent procedure is the
same as step 4.
7. After inputting the name, push the
selector down to select OK.
8. The confirmation screen is
displayed. Confirm that the new
track name is correct, and then
push the interface selector down
to select OK. You will be returned
to the Edit screen of the Original
Playlist or User Playlist.
Changing the Artist Name of the
Original Playlist or User Playlist
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist artist name or a
desired album to change the
original playlist artist name. Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 329 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit User Playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist
Name), then press ENTER on the
interface selector in Edit Album
(or Edit Playlist) screen.
9. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
342
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:53:25 31TK4630_348
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
8. Confirm that the new name is
correct, and then push the
interface selector down to select
OK. You will be returned to the
Edit Album Name screen.
4. On the Edit Album Name screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Artist, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
5. On the Enter an artist name
screen, input the new artist name.
Features
9. Push the selector down to
select OK. The screen returns
to the playlist.
7. The confirmation screen is
displayed. Choose if you would
like to apply the new name to both
the album artist and/or the track
artist. Select Yes or No by turning
the dial, then press ENTER.
6. After inputting the name, push
the interface selector down
to select OK.
CONTINUED
343
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:53:35 31TK4630_349
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
3. The track options box is displayed.
Select Edit Track Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Changing the Artist
Name of the Track
Features
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the artist name. Refer to the
Music Search function on page
329 for how to select a playlist.
Rotate the interface dial to select a
track and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. On the Edit Track screen, turn the
interface dial and select Edit
Track Name, then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
OPTIONS ICON
2. The OPTIONS icon will appear in
the selected track. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
5. On the Edit Track Name screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Edit Artist, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
6. Input the new track name on the
Enter an artist name screen.
7. After inputting the name, push the
selector down to select OK. You
will be returned to the Edit Track
Name screen.
344
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:53:45 31TK4630_350
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
8. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
Features
NOTE:
After selecting the track for which
you want to change the artist’s name,
you can also push the interface
selector down to display the AUDIO
MENU, and then select Edit Track.
The subsequent procedure is the
same as step 4.
Changing the Musical Genre
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist music genre, or a
desired album to change the
original playlist music genre. Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 329 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit User Playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
CONTINUED
345
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:53:53 31TK4630_351
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Features
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist
Name), then press ENTER on the
interface selector in Edit Album
(or Edit Playlist) screen.
Deleting a Track
1. Select the track with the interface
dial from the playback screen
while it is playing. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
4. On the Edit Album Name screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Edit Genre, and then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
2. The OPTIONS icon will appear in
the selected track. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
5. Turn the interface dial to select a
genre, and then press ENTER.
You will be returned to the Edit
Album Name screen.
3. The track options box is displayed.
Select Delete and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
6. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
346
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:54:02 31TK4630_352
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Select OK to confirm you want
to delete the track. You will be
returned to the Playback screen
for the Original Playlist or
User Playlist.
NOTE:
When you delete a track from the
Original Playlist, the track is also
deleted from the User Playlist in
which the deleted track was
stored.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit User Playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
3. On the Edit Album (or Edit
Playlist) screen, turn the interface
dial and select Delete Album (or
Delete Playlist), then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
347
2012 TL
Features
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
Deleting an Album or Playlist
1. On the HDD playback screen of
the album in which you want to
delete, push the interface selector
down to display the AUDIO
MENU.
11/01/14 18:54:12 31TK4630_353
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. The Confirmation is displayed.
Select OK and then press ENTER.
You will be returned to the
playback screen for the Original
Playlist or User Playlist.
NOTE:
When you delete the Original
Playlist, any tracks stored in a
User Playlist are also deleted.
Features
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
348
2012 TL
Acquiring Title Information
1. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Get Album Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
3. On the ‘‘Select an Album’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
the title information for the
Original Playlist, then press
ENTER. You will be returned to
the ‘‘Audio Menu’’ screen.
11/01/14 18:54:23 31TK4630_354
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Checking HDD Audio Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
REMAINING CAPACITY
To check the HDD audio capacity,
push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup,
then press ENTER.
Updating Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database)
You can update the Gracenote
Album Info (Gracenote Media
Database) that is included with the
navigation system.
VERSION
1. Insert the update disc into the disc
slot, or connect the USB flash
memory device that includes the
update.
You can check the HDD Audio
capacity and remaining space as well
as the Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB) version included
with the navigation system on the
HDD Setup screen.
CONTINUED
349
2012 TL
Features
NOTE:
Consult your dealer, or visit
www.acura.com (in U.S.), or
www.acura.ca (in Canada), to acquire
updated files.
11/01/14 18:54:38 31TK4630_355
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Turn the interface dial and select
Update Gracenote Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
2. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU in the
HDD playback screen or CD
playback screen.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
HDD Setup, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
Clearing the HDD
Any music, data, calendar entries,
etc. that have been stored on the
HDD can be deleted.
5. Turn the dial to select USB or
DISC on the Update Gracenote
Album info screen, then press
ENTER on the selector.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
interface dial to select ‘‘Set up,’’
and press ENTER.
6. Turn the dial to select Yes on the
confirmation screen, and the
update will start.
2. Move the interface selector to the
right to navigate to the ‘‘Set up
(Other)’’ screen.
7. Turn the interface dial to select
OK on the confirmation screen.
3. On the ‘‘Set up (Other)’’ screen,
rotate the interface dial to select
‘‘Clear Personal Data,’’ and press
ENTER.
8. After updating is complete,
press ENTER on the
confirmation screen.
NOTE:
Once you perform an update, any
information you edited before will be
overwritten.
350
2012 TL
4. Select the item you wish to delete,
then press ENTER.
5. A trash icon appears next to the
selected item. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue by pressing the interface
selector down.
11/01/14 18:54:50 31TK4630_356
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
7. A second confirmation will appear.
Select Yes to delete, or No to
cancel.
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information, please visit http://www.
gracenote.com/.
8. When you are finished deleting
the data, press ENTER to show
the navigation screen.
NOTE: If you select ‘‘Music on HDD,’’
the system will automatically restart
after deletion.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist,
album, and track information from
CDs to display on the HDD. More
information about Gracenote is
available at www.acura.com (in U.S.)
or www.acura.ca (in Canada).
Features
6. A confirmation screen verifying
whether the deletion is to be
continued or not will be displayed.
Select Yes to delete, or No to
cancel.
When music is recorded to the HDD
from a CD, information such as the
recording artist and track name are
retrieved from the Gracenote
Database and displayed (when
available). Gracenote may not
contain information for all albums.
CONTINUED
351
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:54:58 31TK4630_357
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Features
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to
present Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright 2000 to present
Gracenote. One or more patents
owned by Gracenote apply to this
product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a nonexhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote,
CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the ‘‘Powered by Gracenote’’ logo are
either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Gracenote in the
United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote End User
License Agreement
Version 20061005
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (‘‘Gracenote’’).
The software from Gracenote (the
‘‘Gracenote Software’’) enables this
application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain musicrelated information, including name,
artist, track, and title information
(‘‘Gracenote Data’’) from online
servers or embedded databases
(collectively, ‘‘Gracenote Servers’’)
and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User
functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial
use only.
352
2012 TL
You agree not to assign, copy,
transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers.
11/01/14 18:55:05 31TK4630_358
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a
randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote
service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.
Gracenote makes no representations
or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote Servers or to
change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services
at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE
DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.
IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Gracenote 2011
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed
to you ‘‘AS IS.’’
353
2012 TL
Features
Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to
you for any information that you
provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
11/01/14 18:55:11 31TK4630_359
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
ALBUM ART
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
CENTER DISPLAY
HDD/AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
354
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:55:23 31TK4630_360
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons.
iPod models confirmed to be
compatible with your audio system
using the USB adapter cable are:
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120 GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 5th generation)
iPod touch (1st to 3rd generation)
This system may not work with all
software versions of these devices.
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
CONTINUED
355
2012 TL
Features
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the indash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
HDD/AUX button. The power mode
must be ACCESSORY or ON. The
iPod will also be charged with the
power mode in these settings.
11/01/14 18:55:36 31TK4630_361
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Connecting an iPod
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Features
Do not keep the iPod and dock
connector cable in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pulling it up, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
356
2012 TL
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
11/01/14 18:55:50 31TK4630_362
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the center display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within playing track,
press and hold either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar .
Features
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
You can also select a track from any
category on the list: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers
and Podcasts by using the interface
dial.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Music Search screen.
Turn the interface dial to select a
desired search method.
If a music file on your iPod has
album art, it will be shown in the
display.
You can set this album art display
function on and off (see page 361 ).
CONTINUED
357
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:56:00 31TK4630_363
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
Push the interface selector down to
select ‘‘PLAY SELECTED’’ on any
list. All available files on the selected
list are played.
Features
Press ENTER on the interface
selector to display the items on that
list, then turn the interface dial to
make a selection. Press ENTER to
set your selection.
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
358
2012 TL
The track order that appears at this
time varies depending on the iPod
model and software.
Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
11/01/14 18:56:10 31TK4630_364
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
REPEAT
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Repeat icon and press ENTER.
Playback of the track that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
SHUFFLE ICON
REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file.
SHUFFLE − This feature shuffles
playback of tracks contained within
the iPod. This function can be
established at the same time that
Repeat Playback is set up.
1. Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then
push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Repeat, and press ENTER.
CONTINUED
359
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:56:22 31TK4630_365
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Features
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Shuffle icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select
the Album Shuffle icon and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Shuffle playback of the
album will begin.
Shuffle playback will begin. To
cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON
ALBUM SHUFFLE − Shuffles
playback of all available albums,
which are selected by the desired
list: playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, composers or podcasts. This
function can be selected at the same
time that Repeat Playback is setup.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
360
2012 TL
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
11/01/17 13:15:53 31TK4630_366
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Selecting Album Art
ALBUM ART
Searching Music by Voice
You can search a song by the Song
By Voice feature. See the navigation
system manual for complete details.
To change this feature on or off:
Features
1. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the dial to select Music
Search Setup and press ENTER.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Song By Voice, then press ENTER.
To change this feature on or off:
4. Turn the interface dial to select
ON or OFF, then press ENTER.
Push down the interface selector
to go back to the audio screen.
1. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the dial to select Album Art,
then press ENTER.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
ON or OFF, then press ENTER.
CONTINUED
361
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:56:51 31TK4630_367
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Modifying the Phonetics
To modify the phonetics:
1. Select the Music Search Setup
screen as described previously.
Features
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Phonetic Modification, then press
ENTER.
3. Follow the steps 2 to 11 on pages
335 through 337 .
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio, press the AM/FM,
or
button. Press the DISC
button to switch to the disc mode.
Press the HDD/AUX button to
switch the audio mode between
HDD Audio, USB and Bluetooth
Audio.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
362
*: The displayed message may vary on models
or versions. On some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
2012 TL
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the center display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
USB NO DATA.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
When you connect your iPod to the
navigation system, the most recent
settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be
carried over.
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page 363 .
11/01/14 18:56:56 31TK4630_368
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing an
iPod, find the solution in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error message, take your vehicle
to your dealer.
Error Message
UNSUPPORTED Ver.
CONNECT RETRY
NO SONG
Solution
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated.
Appears when there are no files in the iPod.
Features
363
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:57:02 31TK4630_369
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
CENTER DISPLAY
HDD/ AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
364
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:57:16 31TK4630_370
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as it or your
files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
CONTINUED
* : Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are
are playable on this audio unit.
2012 TL
365
Features
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the disc player. To
play a USB flash memory device,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment, then
press the HDD/AUX button until
you see ‘‘USB’’ in the display. The
power mode must be ACCESSORY
or ON.
11/01/14 18:57:25 31TK4630_371
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
Features
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
366
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:57:33 31TK4630_372
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pulling it up, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
CONTINUED
367
2012 TL
Features
When the USB device is connected
and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the USB indicator, the folder and file
names, and the elapsed time in the
navigation screen.
Connecting a
USB Flash Memory Device
11/01/14 18:57:43 31TK4630_373
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
Features
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it twice to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
To Select a File from Folder
and File Lists
You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the interface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display on the
navigation screen. Use the interface
dial to highlight the file, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
368
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:57:53 31TK4630_374
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.
To Select Repeat,
Random or Scan Mode:
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU.
Move the interface selector up to
select BACK to show the USB
screen, or press the CANCEL button
to return to the previous screen.
Push the selector up to display the
‘‘Select a folder’’ screen. Then turn
the interface dial to select a folder,
and press ENTER.
If you have more than one layer
of folders (folders within
folders), you can also see each
folder on the screen.
CONTINUED
369
2012 TL
Features
You can select any type of repeat,
random or scan mode on the audio
menu screen.
11/01/14 18:58:08 31TK4630_375
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
TRACK REPEAT
REPEAT OFF ICON
3. Turn the interface knob, select
the Track Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the track that
is currently being played will
be repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
TRACK REPEAT ICON
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also cancels this function.
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
This function replays all the tracks
in a folder in the order that they
were stored.
This function repeats playback of
the track.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER.
370
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:58:18 31TK4630_376
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select
the Folder Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the folder that
is currently being played will
be repeated.
TRACK RANDOM
RANDOM OFF ICON
3. Turn the interface dial, select
the Track Random icon and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The tracks are played
in random order.
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This function plays all the tracks on
the USB flash memory device in
random order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
CONTINUED
371
2012 TL
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
11/01/14 18:58:32 31TK4630_377
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
FOLDER RANDOM
3. Turn the interface dial, select
the Folder Random icon and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The files are played in
random order.
TRACK SCAN
SCAN OFF ICON
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
TRACK SCAN ICON
This function samples all the tracks
in the current folder in the order that
they were recorded.
This function plays all of the tracks
in the current folder in random order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
372
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:58:43 31TK4630_378
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Track Scan icon and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Each
track or file is sampled for 10
seconds. When all the tracks in
the folder have been scanned,
regular playback is resumed.
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Folder Scan icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The first file of the first folder is
sampled for 10 seconds. If no other
operations are carried out, the first
files of the remaining folders are
played for 10 seconds. After the first
file of the last folder is played back,
regular playback is resumed.
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This function samples the first file in
each folder within the USB flash
memory device.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar on the control panel.
Press and release the SCAN side of
the bar. Press and hold the SCAN
side of the bar to get out of the scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
373
2012 TL
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector to play the last
track sampled.
FOLDER SCAN
11/01/14 18:58:53 31TK4630_379
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Features
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To play the radio, press the AM/FM,
or
button. Press the DISC
button to switch to the disc mode.
Press the HDD/AUX button to
switch the audio mode between
HDD Audio, USB and Bluetooth
Audio.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
Disconnecting a USB
Flash Memory Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
374
2012 TL
USB Flash Memory
Device Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page 375 .
11/01/14 18:58:58 31TK4630_380
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message
FILE ERROR
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been
damaged.
Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
Appears when the file is copyright protected, such as DRM.
Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory
device.
Features
UNSUPPORTED
UNPLAYABLE FILE
NO SONG
Solution
375
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:59:04 31TK4630_381
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
CENTER DISPLAY
TITLE BUTTON
HDD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SKIP BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
376
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:59:15 31TK4630_382
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by
calling the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
NOTE: In some states, provinces,
and territories, it may be illegal to
perform some data device functions
while driving.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
message and icon on the center
display and the audio control display
on the navigation screen (if selected),
and the system begins to play.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information on how
to select the power mode, see
page 184 .
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
Press the HDD/AUX button* with
the power mode ACCESSORY or
ON. When the phone is recognized,
you will see the Bluetooth Audio
* : If an iPod or USB flash memory device or
audio unit connected to the auxiliary input
jack was selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB or AUX in the center
display and the audio control display on the
navigation screen (if selected). Push the
HDD/AUX button again to play audio files
from your Bluetooth Audio phone.
CONTINUED
377
2012 TL
Features
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 432 ).
11/01/14 18:59:26 31TK4630_383
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Once a device is linked, the name of
the device will appear on the screen.
Pressing the TITLE button switches
the center display between the
Bluetooth Audio and the device
name.
Features
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be a
delay before the system begins to
play.
NOTE: A device name may not be
displayed on some phone devices.
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message after pressing the TITLE
button.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
If your Bluetooth Audio compatible
phone does not operate as described,
make sure it is an Acura approved
phone. To find out if your phone is
approved, go to www.acura.com/
handsfreelink (in Canada, www.
handsfreelink.ca), or call the
HandsFreeLink consumer support
at 1-888-528-7876.
378
2012 TL
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
To skip a file
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
NOTE: The skip function may not be
available on some phone devices.
11/01/14 18:59:36 31TK4630_384
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To pause or resume a file
To change sound settings
Features
Turn the interface dial to switch the
setting between the resume/pause
mode and the sound setup mode.
Select Resume/Pause, then press
ENTER to set your selection. Each
time you press ENTER, the system
switches between the resume mode
and pause mode.
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control display. Turn the
dial to switch the setting between
the resume/pause mode and the
sound setup mode. Select Sound
Setup, then press ENTER to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
379
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:59:48 31TK4630_385
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Turn the dial to select a sound setup
mode, then press ENTER to set your
selection. See page 296 for more
sound setting information.
To switch to HFL mode
Features
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel. The screen and the center
display switch to the HFL mode (see
page 427 ).
To turn off the Bluetooth
Audio mode
Select any other audio mode by
pressing a button; AM/FM,
,
DISC, or HDD/AUX on the audio
control panel, or press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
select another audio mode.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
After ending the call, press the
HANG-UP button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
380
2012 TL
11/01/14 18:59:59 31TK4630_386
Protecting Your Discs
General Information
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
All models
When using CD-R, CD-RW,
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, use
only high quality discs labeled for
audio use.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc
changer.
When recording a CD-R, CD-RW,
DVD-R or DVD-RW the recording
must be closed for it to be used by
the disc player.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
When using DVD-R/RW discs,
they should meet DVD verification
standards.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Features
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
381
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:00:10 31TK4630_387
Protecting Your Discs
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
Features
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Examples of these discs are shown
as follows.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
382
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:00:28 31TK4630_388
Protecting Your Discs
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
With Plastic
Ring
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Triangle Shape
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
Burrs
Can Shape
Arrow Shape
CONTINUED
383
2012 TL
Features
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
11/01/14 19:00:39 31TK4630_389
Protecting Your Discs
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
On models without navigation system
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
On models with navigation system
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or
DVD-RW may not play due to the
recording conditions.
This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
384
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:00:51 31TK4630_390
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
Your vehicle’s radio can receive
the complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these
frequencies:
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Features
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception
How well your vehicle’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and
atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
CONTINUED
385
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:00:59 31TK4630_391
AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources
(such as garages or parking
structures) can cause temporary
reception problems.
386
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:01:09 31TK4630_392
Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON
CH BUTTON
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
If an iPod or a USB flash memory
device is plugged into the system,
you can also select AUX.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
preset station. If you press and hold
the CH button (+) or (−), the
system goes into the skip (seek)
mode. It stops when it finds a station
with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track/file (file in MP3, WMA, or
AAC format) each time you press
the top (+) of the CH button. Press
the bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track/file.
Press it twice to return to the
previous track/file.
In MP3, WMA or AAC mode, you
can use the seek function to select
folders. Press and hold the top (+)
of the CH button until you hear a
beep to skip forward to the first file
of the next folder. Press the bottom
(−) to skip backward to the previous
folder.
CONTINUED
387
2012 TL
Features
VOL BUTTON
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1, XM2, disc (if a disc is loaded),
HDD (on models with navigation
system), Bluetooth Audio (if paired),
AUX (if an appropriate audio unit is
connected).
11/01/14 19:01:14 31TK4630_393
Remote Audio Controls
Features
If you are playing a USB flash
memory device or iPod with the USB
adapter cable, press and release the
top (+) of the CH button to skip
forward to the beginning of the next
file. Press the bottom (−) to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current file. Press it twice to return
to the previous file.
On models without navigation system
If you are playing a conventional CD
(without the text data and not
compressed in MP3 or WMA), you
can use the skip function to select
discs. Press and hold the top (+) of
the CH button until you hear a beep,
to skip forward to the next disc.
Press and hold the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous disc.
When playing a USB flash memory
device, you can also use the seek
function to skip the folder. To
activate this, press and hold either
side of the CH button until you hear
a beep.
388
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:01:20 31TK4630_394
Auxiliary Input Jack
When you plug in a mini-jack cable
between a compatible audio unit and
the jack, you will see AUX in the
display and the system automatically
switches to AUX mode.
Features
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the
HDD/AUX button (AUX button on
models without navigation system)
to select it.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
The auxiliary input jack is inside the
console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
389
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:01:31 31TK4630_395
Radio Theft Protection
Features
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
audio system disables itself. If
this happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display
next time you turn on the system.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
five-digit code. The code is on the
Anti-theft Identification Card
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
The Anti-theft Identification Card
also lists your audio serial number. It
is best to store the card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
you, ask your dealer or go to
https://radionavicode.acura.com/ for
information on how to retrieve it.
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.
NOTE:
If you have a My Acura account, it is
easy to retrieve the anti-theft code
online without having to access the
serial number.
U.S. owners
We recommend that you register the
security code at My Acura (myacura.
myacura.com). If you lose the
Anti-theft Identification Card before
registering the code at My Acura,
you must obtain the code from your
dealer or
https://radionavicode.acura.com/.
To do this, you will need the
audio system’s serial number. If you
do not have the serial number with
390
2012 TL
Canadian owners
If you lose the Anti-theft
Identification Card, you must obtain
the code from your dealer. To do this,
you will need the audio system’s
serial number. If you do not have the
serial number with you, ask your
dealer how to retrieve it.
Models with navigation system
You need to enter a separate code
for the navigation system to
reactivate. The Anti-theft Card also
lists the navigation system’s security
code and serial number. Follow the
same procedure to retrieve the serial
number and obtain the code, and
read the navigation system manual
for details.
11/01/17 13:15:59 31TK4630_396
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
On models without navigation system
CLOCK BUTTON
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
CONTINUED
391
2012 TL
Features
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
11/01/14 19:01:52 31TK4630_397
Setting the Clock
Features
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
On models with navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
On models without navigation system
Adjusting the Clock with SETUP
Button
You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between
24-hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
To adjust the clock setting:
1. Press and release the SETUP
button. The display shows you the
menu items.
You can adjust the clock setting
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
392
2012 TL
2. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’
3. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display changes to the clock
adjusting display.
11/01/14 19:02:04 31TK4630_398
Setting the Clock
4. Turn the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Turning the selector knob will
change the selected item between
the clock display setting, hours,
minutes, and SET. The selected
item is indicated with △ in
the display.
5. Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H.
6. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.
7. To set the time, turn the selector
knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
enter your selection. The display
changes to the setting display.
8. Turn the selector knob to count
the numbers up or down.
CONTINUED
393
2012 TL
Features
MINUTE SETTING
11/01/14 19:02:12 31TK4630_399
Setting the Clock
9. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.
Features
While setting the clock, pressing
the RETURN button will go back
to the previous display.
Pressing the SETUP button again
will cancel this setting mode.
10. To enter the clock setting, turn
the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
display.
11. Press either the RETURN or
SETUP button to go back to the
normal display.
394
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:02:20 31TK4630_400
Security System
On models with keyless access system
You can also deactivate the system
by grabbing either front door handle
while carrying the keyless access
remote to unlock the door.
Once the security system sets,
opening any door, the trunk, or hood
without using the key or the remote
transmitter/keyless access remote,
will cause the alarm to activate. It
also activates if the ignition switch*
is turned to the ON (II) position, the
audio unit is removed from the
dashboard, or the wiring is cut.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
A/T model is shown.
or use driver’s lock tab, master door
lock switch, or remote transmitter
(keyless access remote on models
with keyless access system). The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
On models with keyless access system
You can also set the security system
by pressing the lock button on either
front door handle while carrying the
keyless access remote.
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
395
Features
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two
minutes, then the system resets. To
deactivate the system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or use the
remote transmitter/keyless access
remote.
11/01/14 19:02:27 31TK4630_401
Security System
Features
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter/keyless access remote
without triggering the alarm. The
alarm will sound if the trunk is
opened with the trunk release button
on the driver’s door, the trunk
release handle behind the trunk
pass-through cover, or the
emergency trunk opener.
The security system does not set if
any door, the trunk, or hood is not
fully closed. Before you leave the
vehicle, make sure the doors, trunk
and hood are securely closed.
To see if the system sets after you
exit the vehicle, press the LOCK
button on the remote transmitter/
keyless access remote within five
seconds. If the system is set, the
horn will beep once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
396
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:02:40 31TK4630_402
Compass
On models without navigation system
Compass Calibration
COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
COMPASS
U.S. model is shown.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is
self-calibrating, then the compass
display is shown in the display.
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following
procedure.
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
CONTINUED
397
2012 TL
Features
Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings,
past large vehicles, or driving near
large objects that can cause a
magnetic disturbance. It can also be
affected by accessories such
as antennas and roof racks that are
mounted by magnets.
11/01/14 19:02:51 31TK4630_403
Compass
5. Press the selector knob (ENTER).
The compass display is blinking
and the CAL indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
Features
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’
4. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display shows you ‘‘PUSH CAL
START.’’
While setting the compass, press
the RETURN button to go back to
the previous display. Pressing the
SETUP button will cancel the
compass setting mode.
398
2012 TL
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is calibrating, the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.
11/01/14 19:03:04 31TK4630_404
Compass
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to enter your selection.
The display shows you the
currently selected zone number.
ZONE NUMBER
4. Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page 400 ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector knob to cycle the zone
lists up or down.
5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector knob. The
display then returns to normal.
If necessary, press the RETURN
button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the SETUP
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
CONTINUED
399
2012 TL
Features
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
11/01/14 19:03:08 31TK4630_405
Compass
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
Zone Map
Features
400
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:03:19 31TK4630_406
Cruise Control
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel will come on.
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
The cruise control system can be
left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
CONTINUED
401
2012 TL
Features
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
11/01/14 19:03:31 31TK4630_407
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Features
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle speeds up about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
402
2012 TL
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.
11/01/14 19:03:41 31TK4630_408
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
Features
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
CANCEL BUTTON
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
403
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:03:54 31TK4630_409
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
Features
General Safety Information
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
404
2012 TL
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 10−20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
11/01/14 19:04:12 31TK4630_410
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Features
CONTINUED
405
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:04:18 31TK4630_411
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Features
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
406
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:04:32 31TK4630_412
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
Voice Control Tips
HFL Buttons
MICROPHONE
HFL TALK BUTTON
Features
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink, or call (888) 528-7876.
HFL BACK BUTTON
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
HFL Talk button − Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents,
windows and moonroof may
interfere with the microphone.
Adjust or close them as necessary.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.
CONTINUED
407
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:04:45 31TK4630_413
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Features
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456-####’’ or
‘‘Dial Peter.’’
Information Display
As an incoming call notification, you
will see the following display:
SIGNAL
STRENGTH
HFL
MODE
SIGNAL STRENGTH
BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
ROAM STATUS
PHONE NUMBER
Help Features
To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
ROAM STATUS
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFL.
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’
408
2012 TL
When there is an incoming call, or
HFL is in use, ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’
will appear on the display.
‘‘
’’ indicator will be displayed on
the audio display when a phone is
linked.
11/01/14 19:04:56 31TK4630_414
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Press HFL
Talk button
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’
Pair a phone to the system (See page 412)
‘‘Edit’’
Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 413)
‘‘Delete’’
Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 413)
‘‘List’’
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 413)
‘‘Status’’
Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 414)
‘‘Next Phone’’
Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 414)
‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’
Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 414)
‘‘123-456-####’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’
Features
‘‘Phone Setup’’
‘‘Pair’’
Enter desired phone number (See page 415)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 415)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
CONTINUED
409
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:05:05 31TK4630_415
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Features
‘‘Redial’’
Redial the last number called (See page 415)
‘‘Transfer’’
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 416)
‘‘Mute’’
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 417)
‘‘Send’’
Send numbers or names during a call (See page 417)
Press HFL
Talk button
‘‘Phonebook’’
‘‘Store’’
Store a phonebook entry (See page 418)
‘‘Edit’’
Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 418)
‘‘Delete’’
Delete a phonebook entry (See page 419)
‘‘Receive
Contact’’
If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 419)
‘‘List’’
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 419)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
410
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:05:14 31TK4630_416
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
‘‘Security’’
‘‘Change Passcode’’
Change your security passcode(See page 421)
‘‘Call Notification’’
Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
(See page 421)
‘‘Auto Transfer’’
Press HFL
Talk button
‘‘Clear’’
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle(See page 421)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode(See page 422)
‘‘Change Language’’
Change language from English to French (See page 422)*
‘‘Tutorial’’
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system(See page 408)
‘‘Hands Free Help’’
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 408)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
* : Canadian models
CONTINUED
411
2012 TL
Features
‘‘System
Set up’’
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 420)
11/01/14 19:05:28 31TK4630_417
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
Phone Setup
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
Phone pairing tips
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Features
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle.
412
2012 TL
To pair a cell phone:
1. Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
11/01/14 19:05:43 31TK4630_418
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To rename a paired phone:
To delete a paired phone:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
3. If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.
3. HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.
To hear the names of all paired
phones:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
3. HFL will read out all the paired
phone’s names.
CONTINUED
413
2012 TL
Features
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
11/01/14 19:05:59 31TK4630_419
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the
prompts.
To change the pairing code setting:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
Features
3. HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.
3. HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
4. Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
414
2012 TL
2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
prompts.
3. If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
and follow the HFL prompts.
11/01/14 19:06:15 31TK4630_420
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone
number or a name in the HFL
phonebook. You can also redial the
last number called.
During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
To make a call using a phone
number:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name stored in the HFL
phonebook that you want to call.
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make the
call.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers.
To redial the last number called by
HFL:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’
415
2012 TL
Features
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFL. HFL
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
To make a call using a name in the
HFL phonebook:
11/01/14 19:06:24 31TK4630_421
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.
Features
Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
416
2012 TL
Transferring a Call
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’
11/01/14 19:06:38 31TK4630_422
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Muting a Call
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during a
call.
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘Mute’’ again.
To send a name or
number during a call:
Phonebook
You can store up to 50 names with
their associated numbers in HFL.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (#), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
CONTINUED
417
2012 TL
Features
To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’
Send Numbers or
Names During a Call
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.
11/01/14 19:06:56 31TK4630_423
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To store a phonebook entry:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
Features
4. Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.
To edit the number stored in a name:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name entry you want to edit.
4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
5. Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.
5. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry.
418
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:07:14 31TK4630_424
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To list all names in the phonebook:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
3. Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.
3. HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.
To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Call.’’
2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.
419
2012 TL
Features
To delete a name:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
11/01/14 19:07:24 31TK4630_425
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
System Setup
This command group allows you to
change or customize HFL basic
settings.
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system for security purposes:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
Features
2. Say ‘‘Security’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
420
2012 TL
NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer will have
to reset it for you, or you will have to
clear the entire system (see
page 422 ).
11/01/14 19:07:41 31TK4630_426
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
To change your security passcode:
To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification*:
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the
prompts.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
* : The default setting is a ring tone.
3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
Features
2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the
prompts.
To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:
2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
prompts.
CONTINUED
421
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:08:00 31TK4630_427
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To clear the system:
Quick Language Selection
Change Language
This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, and all names in the
HFL phonebook.
Canadian models only
To quickly change the language:
Canadian models only
To change the system language
between English and French:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Features
1. Say the language you want to
change to in that language.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
2. Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.
If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.
You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘System
clear.’’ Paired phones, and all names
in the HFL phonebook will be lost.
When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.
422
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:08:08 31TK4630_428
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will
interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is
playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
423
2012 TL
Features
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
11/01/14 19:08:23 31TK4630_429
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using either the
navigation system controls or voice
commands without the distraction of
handling your cell phone.
Features
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit
Using HFL
Interface Dial
CANCEL
BUTTON
INFO BUTTON
DIAL
SELECTOR
ENTER
PHONE BUTTON
www.acura.com/ handsfreelink ,
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
Use the Interface Dial to make menu
or list selections.
To select an item on the screen, turn
the interface dial left or right to
highlight it, and then press ENTER.
To select an item that comes with
,
,
, or
icons,
push the interface selector up, down,
left, or right.
424
2012 TL
When a phone has never been paired to
the system:
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to enter the phone pairing
procedure (see page 432 ).
11/01/14 19:08:35 31TK4630_430
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Buttons
PICK-UP BUTTON
HANG-UP
BUTTON
Features
U.S. model is shown.
When there is a paired phone
is in your vehicle:
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Cellular
Phone screen.
Press the INFO button to go to the
main information screen to select the
Cellular Phone menu.
Press the CANCEL button to go
back to the previous screen.
TALK
BUTTON
BACK BUTTON
PICK-UP Button − Press and
release to answer a call, or press to
go directly to the Cellular Phone
screen.
HANG-UP Button − Press and
release to end or decline a call.
CONTINUED
425
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:08:47 31TK4630_431
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
TALK Button − Press and release
to give a command.
Voice Control Tips
MICROPHONE
When the Cellular Phone screen is
displayed, pressing the TALK button
guides you through all available
functions.
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Features
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
BACK Button − Press and release
to go back to the previous command,
or cancel the command.
Help Feature
For help at any time, including a list
of available options, say ‘‘Help.’’
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents,
windows and moonroof may
interfere with the microphone.
Adjust or close them as necessary.
Press and release the Talk button
each time you want to make a
command. After the beep, speak in
a clear, natural tone.
426
2012 TL
Language Selection
Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to change the
system’s language between English,
French, and Spanish.
11/01/14 19:08:57 31TK4630_432
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Display
CALLER NAME
PHONE DIALING
As an incoming call notification, you
will see the following display:
BATTERY LEVEL
STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
ROAM STATUS
LENGTH OF CALL TIME
To answer the call and show the
HFL information, press the PICK-UP
button on the steering wheel.
U.S. model is shown.
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFL.
427
2012 TL
Features
When the audio is in use.
11/01/14 19:09:06 31TK4630_433
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON (see page 184 ).
Features
All
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls (see page 445).
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Dial
Display the last 20 outgoing calls (see page 445).
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Receive
Display the last 20 incoming calls (see page 445).
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Missed
Display the last 20 missed calls (see page 445).
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Call History
Cellular
Phone
Phone Book
Dial
More
Speed Dial
Redial
Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook (or import a new one)
(see page 444).
Enter a phone number to dial (see page 445).
Displays a list of all 20 speed dial entries. The first 4 speed dial numbers are shown on the
Cellular Phone screen (see page 446).
Push and hold the interface selector (ENTER) to redial the last number called by HFL
(see page 446).
Voice commands can be used for all above options.
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
428
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:09:14 31TK4630_434
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Add New Phone
Connect a paired phone to the system (see page 436).
Connect
Connection
Disconnect a paired phone from the system (see page 436).
Disconnect
Delete
Delete a previously paired phone (see page 435).
Create a Pass-key number for a paired phone (see page 435).
Pass-key
Phone
Setup
Edit
Speed Dial
Features
Cellular
Phone
Pair a phone to the system (see page 432).
Store
Speed Dial
Select a number from the Call History, Phone Book, or manual
entry to store as a speed dial number (see page 442).
Delete
Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial number (see page 444).
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number (see page 443).
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number (see page 443).
Voice commands can be used for all above options.
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
CONTINUED
429
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:09:19 31TK4630_435
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Cellular
Phone
Phone
Setup
Edit Phone
Name/PIN
Create a phone name/PIN number for a paired phone (see page 437).
Features
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle
(see page 439).
Auto Answer
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered (see page 439).
Clear Cellular
Phone
Information
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys
(see page 439).
Voice commands can be used for all above options.
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
430
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:09:30 31TK4630_436
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
Cellular Phone
Phone Setup
You can set up your phone and other
system options with this menu.
Features
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
Push the selector down for
PHONE SETUP.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Cellular
Phone screen.
Select ‘‘PHONE SETUP’’ from the
Cellular Phone screen.
CONTINUED
431
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:09:39 31TK4630_437
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Setup Bluetooth Phone
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system):
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system starts pairing
when there is no phone paired to the
system.
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system prompts
you to pair a phone. Select ‘‘Yes’’
on the confirmation screen.
432
2012 TL
2. Make sure your phone is set to
discoverable or visibility is ON,
and select ‘‘OK.’’ HFL begins to
search for your phone.
11/01/14 19:09:52 31TK4630_438
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Features
U.S. model is shown.
3. If your phone is found, it is
displayed on the screen. Select it
and press ENTER.
5. HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key
that you will need to input on your
phone.
4. If your phone doesn’t appear on
the list, select ‘‘Phone not found?’’
and search for Bluetooth devices
using your phone. From your
phone, select ‘‘HandsFreeLink.’’
6. When your phone prompts you,
input the 4-digit pass-key.
On U.S. models
You will receive a notification to set
up an AcuraLink connection. If you
want to do this, please see page 449 ,
or select ‘‘Setup Later.’’
7. You will receive a notification on
the screen and your phone if
pairing is successful.
CONTINUED
433
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:10:04 31TK4630_439
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To pair a cell phone (when there are one
or more phones paired to the system):
Phone pairing tips
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Features
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
1. Select ‘‘PHONE SETUP’’ from the
Cellular Phone screen.
2. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
4. Select an empty location on the list.
Make sure your phone is set to
discoverable or visibility is ON.
5. Follow steps 2 through 7 from the
previous page.
3. Select ‘‘Add New Phone.’’
434
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:10:19 31TK4630_440
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To change the pass-key setting:
To delete a paired phone:
Example
TRASH ICON
Features
Push the selector to left to delete.
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Pass-key.’’
NOTE: The default pass-key ‘‘0000’’
is used until you change the setting.
To create your own pass-key, select
‘‘Fixed’’ and follow steps 3 and 4.
3. Delete the current pass-key.
4. Enter a new pass-key, and select
‘‘OK.’’
BLUETOOTH ICON
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete.’’
3. Select the phone you want to
delete. The Bluetooth icon shows
you the currently linked phone.
For a randomly generated pass-key
each time you pair a phone, select
‘‘Random.’’
CONTINUED
435
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:10:34 31TK4630_441
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
To connect another paired phone:
To disconnect a paired phone:
5. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
Features
BLUETOOTH ICON
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Connect.’’
2. Select ‘‘Disconnect.’’
3. Select the phone you want to
connect. The Bluetooth icon
shows you the currently linked
phone.
3. Select the phone you want to
disconnect. The Bluetooth icon
shows you the currently linked
phone.
4. Select ‘‘OK’’ to continue.
436
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:10:45 31TK4630_442
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
4. Select ‘‘OK’’ to continue.
Edit Phone Name/PIN
5. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
You can name up to six HFL phone
names. Each can be PIN protected,
and have its own phonebook, speed
dial, and call history.
To edit a phone name:
Select a phone name.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Edit Phone Name/PIN’’
from the Phone Setup screen.
2. Push the interface selector left or
right to select the phone name you
want to edit on the Edit Phone
Name/PIN screen.
CONTINUED
437
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:10:59 31TK4630_443
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To name a phone:
To create a PIN for each phone:
When you set a PIN for a phone, you
will be asked to enter the PIN every
time you select the phone.
4. Enter a 4-digit PIN, re-enter it, and
select ‘‘OK.’’
If you select ‘‘DO NOT USE PIN,’’
before entering any number, the
phone will not have a PIN.
Features
If the phone is already PIN-protected,
you need to enter the current PIN
before creating a new one.
1. Select ‘‘Edit Phone Name/PIN’’
from the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Phone Name.’’
3. Enter a phone name, and select
‘‘OK’’ when complete.
1. Select ‘‘Edit Phone Name/PIN’’
from the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select a phone to set a PIN (see
page 437 ).
3. Select ‘‘PIN.’’
438
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:11:14 31TK4630_444
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic Transferring
Automatic Answering
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the power mode in
ACCESSORY or ON (see page 185 ).
You can choose when the HFL
system automatically answers
incoming calls.
To clear the cellular phone
information (one phone)
Clearing a phone name will clear all
settings, such as call history and
phonebook.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Auto Answer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Transfer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Off,’’ ‘‘2sec,’’ ‘‘5sec,’’ or
‘‘10sec.’’
2. Select ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’
1. Select ‘‘Clear Cellular Phone
Information’’ from the Phone
Setup screen.
2. Select the phone you want to clear.
CONTINUED
439
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:11:26 31TK4630_445
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
3. A trash icon appears next to the
selected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
To clear the cellular phone
information (all phones)
On the navigation SET UP screen
4. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
This operation clears all stored
settings for the cell phones paired to
the vehicle.
Features
1. Press the INFO button on the
control panel.
2. Select ‘‘Set up’’ from the Main Info
screen.
3. Push the interface selector to the
right to select the Other tab on the
SET UP screen. Select ‘‘Clear
Personal Data.’’
4. Select ‘‘Cellular Phone
Information.’’
440
2012 TL
5. A trash icon appears next to the
selected item. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
confirm.
6. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
11/03/31 15:09:10 31TK4630_446
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic Import Cellular
Phonebook and Call History
(available on some phones)
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook and call
history are automatically imported
to HFL.
Up to three category icons appear
next to the phonebook entries*.
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Voice
Work
Other
Features
Preference
Edit Speed Dial
The first four speed dial entries.
Pager
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
* : Available on some phones
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be
stored per phone name, and the first
four numbers are displayed on the
Cellular Phone screen.
Select a ‘‘No Entry’’ field to store a
speed dial entry, or use the following
procedure.
CONTINUED
441
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:11:50 31TK4630_447
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
5. When the speed dial number is
successfully stored, you are asked
to store a voice tag for the number.
Follow the prompts.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Store Speed Dial.’’
Features
When a voice tag is stored for the
entry, you can dial the number by
saying ‘‘Dial by voice tag,’’ followed
by the voice tag and ‘‘Dial’’ from any
screen.
3. Select a number on the speed dial
list where you want to store the
number.
4. Choose a number from:
Phonebook − the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook
Call History − the last 20
numbers
Dial − manual number input
442
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:12:07 31TK4630_448
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To add a voice tag to a
stored speed dial number:
To delete a voice tag:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’
2. Select ‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
4. Follow the prompts to complete
the voice tag.
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
longer name. For example, use
‘‘John Smith’’ instead of ‘‘John.’’
CONTINUED
443
2012 TL
Features
3. Select the number you want to
delete the voice tag for.
3. Select the number you want to
store a voice tag for.
11/03/31 15:09:21 31TK4630_449
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To delete a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any
phone number, using the imported
phonebook, using the call history, or
with speed dial entries.
To make a call using a
name in the Phone Book:
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook and call
history are automatically
imported to HFL.
Features
3. Select the number you want to
delete, and push ENTER.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
1. Select ‘‘Phone Book’’ from the
Cellular Phone screen.
2. Select a name from the list.
444
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:12:37 31TK4630_450
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
3. Push ENTER to list the number or
numbers stored for the selected
name.
To make a call using a phone number:
To make a call using Call History:
HISTORY LIST
4. Select a number and push ENTER
to begin automatic dialing.
Features
Push down the selector to dial.
1. Select ‘‘Dial’’ from the Cellular
Phone screen.
1. Select ‘‘Call History’’ from the
Cellular Phone screen.
2. Enter the phone number, and
select ‘‘Dial.’’
2. Call History is sorted by ‘‘All,’’
‘‘Dial,’’ ‘‘Receive,’’ and ‘‘Missed.’’
Selecting a number begins
automatic dialing.
To enter the phone number by voice,
press the TALK button and say it in
a continuous string.
NOTE: Some phones do not support
‘‘All’’ in the Call History.
CONTINUED
445
2012 TL
11/03/31 15:09:29 31TK4630_451
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call using Speed Dial:
SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON
To make a call using More Speed Dial:
To make a call using Redial:
1. Select ‘‘More Speed Dial’’ on the
Cellular Phone screen.
Press and hold the PICK-UP button
to redial the last number dialed in
your phone’s history. On the Cellular
Phone screen, you can also redial by
pressing and holding ENTER.
Features
2. A list of up to 20 stored speed dial
entries is shown. Select the entry
you want to call, and push ENTER
to begin automatic dialing.
VOICE TAG ICON
Select one of the four entries on the
Cellular Phone screen, and push
ENTER to begin automatic dialing.
NOTE: Any voice-tagged speed dial
entry can be dialed by voice from
any screen. Press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Dial by voice tag,’’ followed
by the voice tag name and ‘‘Dial.’’
446
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:13:00 31TK4630_452
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, a
notification appears on the screen
(see page 427 ).
During a Call
Example
Transfer − Allows you to transfer a
call from HFL to your phone, or
from your phone to HFL.
Mute − Allows you to mute your
To answer the call, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel.
voice.
Features
To end or decline the call, press the
HANG-UP button.
The following options are available
during a call:
Dial Tones* − Allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
* : Available on some phones
CONTINUED
447
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:13:12 31TK4630_453
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the PICK-UP button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
Features
To return to the original call, press
the PICK-UP button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HANG-UP button.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will
interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is
playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
U.S. models only
In addition, you cannot use HFL
while using AcuraLink.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
448
2012 TL
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
11/01/14 19:13:24 31TK4630_454
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
On models with navigation system
Interface Dial
Most AcuraLink functions are
controlled by the interface dial. The
interface dial has two parts, a dial
and a selector.
CANCEL BUTTON
INFO BUTTON
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
Features
AcuraLink enhances your
ownership experience by providing a
direct communication link between
your vehicle and the Acura Server.
Working through the XM Radio,
AcuraLink works in conjunction with
the navigation system, Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audio
system in your vehicle. It displays
and receives several kinds of
messages, including:
Operating tips and information on
your vehicle’s features.
Important recall and safety
information.
Maintenance information to keep
your vehicle in top condition.
DIAL
ENTER
SELECTOR
The dial turns left and right. Use it to
make selections or adjustments to a
list or menu on the screen.
Diagnostic information to provide
information about any problems
with your vehicle.
449
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:13:38 31TK4630_455
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To view previously read messages:
Reading Messages
If you have new messages, an
envelope icon appears in the lower
left hand part of the navigation
screen.
Features
A list of all messages will be shown.
New messages will be at the top.
Select the message you want to read
by pressing ENTER.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Messages
from the navigation system map
menu.
A red exclamation will be marked on
an envelope icon with an important
message.
450
2012 TL
Press the INFO button. The
information screen will be shown.
11/01/14 19:13:50 31TK4630_456
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Unread messages have a closed
envelope icon next to them. The
icon disappears when it has already
been read.
Message Options
Select ‘‘Messages,’’ then select a
message category. Select the
message you want to read and
press ENTER.
After purchasing your vehicle,
messages may not appear
immediately.
Your dealer has to register the
vehicle identification before you can
receive messages. This can take
several days to process.
Features
NOTE: Only Diagnostic Info
messages appear on the navigation
screen while driving. They indicate if
your vehicle has a problem that may
need immediate attention (see
page 460 ).
When you open a message, you can
read a summary of it, and then
choose one of several options. If an
option is not available for a message,
that option will not be highlighted.
CONTINUED
451
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:14:01 31TK4630_457
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Delete − Select this option to delete
the current message.
Features
Voice − Select this option to hear
a voice read the entire message.
This gives you more information
than the screen can display at one
time. When you select the Voice
option, it changes to a Stop
Reading option. Select the option
again to stop the voice.
Call − Select this option to call a
phone number embedded in the
message. When you select Call,
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
dials the number for you.
Find Acura Dlr. − Select this
option to find the nearest Acura
dealer using the navigation system.
Call Your Dealer − Select this
option to call the Acura dealer you
purchased your vehicle from.
AcuraLink also directs you to this
dealer so you can schedule a
maintenance appointment or receive
information about a message. If your
assigned servicing dealer changes,
AcuraLink will reset to call that
dealer.
To make a call, your Bluetooth
compatible phone must be paired to
the vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,
powered on, and located within the
vehicle (see page 432 ).
452
2012 TL
Diagnostic Info − Select this
option to get more information about
the current diagnostic message. To
use this option, your cell phone must
be paired with HFL. In addition, the
paired phone must have a compatible
data service and be set up with the
AcuraLink system to make a data
connection. Go to www.acura.com/
handsfreelink to find out which data
services are currently compatible
with AcuraLink.
Message Preferences
To set your AcuraLink preferences
(the types of messages you want to
receive, if any), visit the My Acura
website at www.owners.acura.com, and
choose what you would like to
receive. If you do not have internet
access, call Acura Client Relations at
(800) 382-2238; they can set your
message preferences for you.
11/01/14 19:14:14 31TK4630_458
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To delete all messages:
NOTE: The Delete All Messages
command does not apply to
Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
They can only be deleted by your
dealer.
Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Press the INFO button to view the
INFO screen. Select ‘‘Set up’’ with
the interface dial, then press
ENTER to view the SET UP
screen.
Select the message category that
contains the message you want to
delete.
Select Other by pushing the
interface selector to the right.
Use the interface dial to scroll to
the AcuraLink/Messages option,
and select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Scroll to the Delete Messages
option, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the category with the
messages you want to delete, and
select the category by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Use the interface dial to scroll up
or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface
dial, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
453
2012 TL
Features
Deleting Messages
NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/
campaign messages can only be
deleted by your dealer.
To delete a single message:
Press the INFO button to bring up
the INFO screen.
11/01/14 19:14:26 31TK4630_459
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Features
Message Categories
There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Feature Guide, Quick
Tips, Scheduled Dealer
Appointments, Recalls/Campaigns,
Diagnostic Info, and Maintenance
MinderTM. The system can store up
to 255 messages.
Quick Tips
Feature Guide
These messages, based on updated
vehicle information and comments
from other TL owners, supplement
your Owner’s Manual. They provide
you with relevant information for a
safe and enjoyable ownership
experience. For additional
information, call Acura Client
Services directly through HFL.
During the first 90 days of
ownership, a number of messages
appears each day. These messages
help you to use and understand the
features of your vehicle.
Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.
454
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:14:38 31TK4630_460
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Maintenance MinderTM
You can use the following
message options:
Make an appointment from the
schedule at the dealer.
Call your dealer for an
appointment.
Find the nearest dealer.
These messages provide detailed
information about the service
needed for your vehicle. When a
maintenance message appears on
the multi-information display, a list of
needed maintenance items is
provided through an AcuraLink
message. These messages tell you
the exact maintenance needed,
helping you to avoid unnecessary
maintenance costs.
To use the automated appointment
function, you should visit the My
Acura website at
www.owners.acura.com, register some
required settings, and complete the
Phone-Data Connection set-up (see
page 463 ). Your Bluetooth
compatible phone should also be
paired and linked to your vehicle
(see page 432 ).
CONTINUED
455
2012 TL
Features
Reschedule the appointment with
the dealer.
Automated Appointment
You can make an appointment with
your dealer through AcuraLink
when you receive a Maintenance
Minder message.
11/01/14 19:14:46 31TK4630_461
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you an appropriate
appointment date and time on the
navigation screen. If you accept this
appointment, select ‘‘Confirm
Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.
Features
When you see the Maintenance
Minder message on the multiinformation display, you will also
receive a message in the navigation
screen. To open the message, press
ENTER. Select ‘‘New Messages,’’
then press ENTER. You will see the
list of all messages. The most recent
message is listed at the top.
Select the received message, then
press ENTER. You will see the
message as shown. To make an
appointment, select ‘‘Schedule
Dealer Appt.’’ then press ENTER.
456
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:14:59 31TK4630_462
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Scheduled Dealer Appointments
To reschedule the appointment:
You will see the screen to reschedule
as shown. To make an appointment,
select ‘‘Reschedule Appointment,’’
then press ENTER.
Features
The confirmation message will be
displayed on the screen. Make sure
to confirm the appointment date,
time and dealer. If it is OK, press
ENTER.
If you want to change or reschedule
the appointment date, select ‘‘Cancel,’’
then press ENTER.
Press the INFO button to go to the
INFO screen. Select ‘‘Messages,’’
then select ‘‘Scheduled Dealer
Appointments’’ from the message
category list. Then press ENTER.
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you a new appointment date
and time on the navigation screen. If
you accept this appointment, select
‘‘Confirm Appointment,’’ then press
ENTER.
CONTINUED
457
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:15:09 31TK4630_463
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To cancel the appointment:
Features
Select ‘‘Messages’’ on the INFO
screen, then press ENTER. Select
‘‘Scheduled Dealer Appointments’’
from the message category list.
Then press ENTER. To cancel the
appointment, select ‘‘Cancel
Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.
The system will request you to
confirm the cancellation on the
navigation screen. To cancel the
appointment, select ‘‘YES,’’ then
press ENTER. If you select ‘‘NO,’’
the screen goes back to the previous
message display.
458
2012 TL
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you the confirmation on the
navigation screen. If you accept the
cancellation, press ENTER.
If you cancel the appointment, you
cannot reschedule it. If you want to
change or reschedule the
appointment date, call your dealer
directly with HFL.
11/01/14 19:15:17 31TK4630_464
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Using automated appointments, your
registered dealer through My Acura
is automatically selected. If you want
to select another dealer, such as in
case of an emergency, find the
nearest dealer and call the dealer
directly with HFL.
Recall/Campaigns
For this reason, it is important that
we retain your current phone
number. Please update your
information using My Acura at
www.owners.acura.com.
Features
When a maintenance appointment is
due soon, you will also receive an
appointment reminder message.
If your vehicle is affected by a recall
or other important safety
information, a letter will be mailed to
you about the issue and how to fix it.
You will also receive a reminder
message through AcuraLink. You
can then use the message options to
call your dealer for an appointment
or to find the nearest dealer.
459
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:15:28 31TK4630_465
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
If you want the information now,
select the Check Now option. (If the
navigation screen is not active, you
must select OK from the navigation
disclaimer screen before you can
check the information.)
Features
Diagnostic Info
When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MultiInformation Display (MID),
AcuraLink can provide information
about the cause of the indicator or
message and the recommended
action to address it. This helps you
handle the problem as it occurs,
preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot
determine mechanical problems
(such as squeaks or rattles) that are
not triggered by the diagnostic
indicator monitors.
For more information on the
instrument panel indicators, see
page 64 .
Depending on the severity of the
problem, the message will let you
know if you should see your dealer
immediately or if you can wait until a
later date.
When any indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MID,
AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.
AcuraLink can help you decide what
to do.’’
If you do not want the
information right away, select the
Check Later option.
460
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:15:39 31TK4630_466
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
When viewing a diagnostic info
message through the INFO menu,
you can select the Diagnostic Info
option to connect to the Acura server
and retrieve the latest information
regarding the problem.
Reminder Message
You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the
nearest dealer.
Features
NOTE: There may not be any
additional information, depending on
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.
When you make an appointment
through My Acura’s online Schedule
Service Appointment, you can be
reminded in advance about that
appointment through AcuraLink.
If you need to reschedule or cancel
the appointment, see page 457 .
CONTINUED
461
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:15:47 31TK4630_467
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Turning the Automated Appointment
preference off will disable
appointment notifications in the
vehicle based on appointments
created or changed at My Acura’s
online scheduling website.
AcuraLink/Message Screen
Features
Appointments can still be created,
rescheduled, and canceled from the
vehicle; however the appointment
information stored in the vehicle will
not be updated. Any changes to
those appointments should be made
from the My Acura website.
To access the following functions,
press the INFO button. Select ‘‘Set
up’’ to view the SET UP screen. Push
the interface selector to the right to
select Other, then rotate the
interface dial to select AcuraLink/
Messages.
Delete Messages − Select this
option to delete all stored messages
within a category, except for
diagnostic info and recall campaign
messages. These messages can only
be deleted by a certified technician
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a
broadcast message from Acura.
462
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:15:56 31TK4630_468
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Phone-Data Connection − Select
this option to begin the process
required to connect to Acura. This is
used to access the most recent
diagnostic information when a
problem occurs.
Features
New Message Notification −
Select ON if you want to be notified
of new messages (envelope icon
appears on the navigation screen).
Select OFF if you do not want to be
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the screen).
Messages can still be accessed using
the INFO menu. If you would like to
stop receiving messages, visit the
My Acura website at www.owners.
acura.com to change your messaging
preferences.
NOTE: For the Phone-Data
Connection option to be active, you
need a Bluetooth compatible and
enabled cell phone paired to
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
To complete the data connection
setup, the paired phone must have a
compatible data service.
Auto Reading − Select ON
to have the system automatically
read each message to you. Select
OFF to manually select the Voice
option when you want a message
read to you.
CONTINUED
463
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:16:02 31TK4630_469
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To find more information on
Bluetooth compatible and enabled
cell phones, visit
www.acura.com/handsfreelink or call
the HandsFreeLink consumer
support at 1-888-528-7876.
Features
Connect to the Acura Server −
The default setting is prompt. When
a diagnostic info message appears,
and you select the Check Now option,
the system will prompt you before
connecting to the Acura server. If
you do not wish to connect at that
time, select No at the prompt, and
you will see the information from the
onboard database. The ‘‘Auto’’
setting will remove the prompt when
you select the Check Now option and
will automatically connect to the
Acura server. This setting only
applies when you have a Bluetooth
enabled phone that is paired with
HFL and you have completed the
Phone-Data Connection setup.
464
2012 TL
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
11/01/14 19:16:06 31TK4630_470
Rearview Camera and Monitor
On models with navigation system
Refer to the navigation system
manual for operation of the rearview
camera.
Features
465
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:16:08 31TK4630_471
466
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:16:12 31TK4630_472
Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 468
Fuel Recommendation .................. 468
Service Station Procedures .......... 470
Refueling..................................... 470
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 471
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 472
Oil Check .................................... 474
Engine Coolant Check .............. 475
Fuel Economy ................................ 476
Accessories and Modifications .... 479
Carrying Cargo .............................. 481
467
2012 TL
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
11/01/14 19:16:23 31TK4630_473
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Before Driving
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
multi-information display indicates
it is needed.
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane of 91 or higher. If this
octane grade is unavailable, regular
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane of 87 or higher may be used
temporarily. The use of regular
unleaded gasoline can cause metallic
knocking noises in the engine and
will result in decreased engine
performance. The long-term use of
regular-grade gasoline can lead to
engine damage.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
468
2012 TL
On vehicles with manual transmission
You may hear a knocking noise from
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to
a lower gear.
11/01/14 19:16:29 31TK4630_474
Fuel Recommendation
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or on
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, visit My Acura at
owners.acura.com. In Canada, visit
www.acura.ca for additional
information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
Before Driving
We recommend quality gasoline
containing detergent additives that help
prevent f uel system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
perf ormance, f uel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain harmf ul manganesebased f uel additives such as MMT, if
such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely af f ect perf ormance, and
cause the malf unction indicator lamp
on your instrument panel to come on. If
this happens, contact your dealer f or
service. Some gasoline today is blended
with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to
10% ethanol by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol. If you
notice any undesirable operating
symptoms, try another service station
or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Because the level of detergency and
additives in gasoline vary in the
market, Honda endorses the use of
‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’
where available to help maintain the
performance and reliability of your
vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline
standard jointly established by
leading automotive manufacturers to
meet the needs of today’s advanced
engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers
will, in most cases, identify their
gasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline’’ standards at the
retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper
level of detergent additives and be
free of metallic additives. The proper
level of detergent additives, and
absence of harmful metallic additives
in gasoline, help avoid build-up of
deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
469
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:16:40 31TK4630_475
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Push
Before Driving
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
FUEL FILL CAP
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button in the driver’s door (to
open the fuel fill door manually,
see page 599 ).
HOLDER
TETHER
470
2012 TL
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel fill door with a tether to avoid
losing the cap.
11/01/14 19:16:49 31TK4630_476
Service Station Procedures
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is
detected a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
471
2012 TL
Before Driving
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display. If the system
still detects an evaporative system
leak after retightening the cap, the
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page 597 ).
11/01/14 19:16:57 31TK4630_477
Service Station Procedures
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
message, press the INFO button.
Before Driving
The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 597 .
Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
472
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:17:06 31TK4630_478
Service Station Procedures
To close the hood, lower it to about a
foot (30 cm) above the fender, then
press down firmly with your hands.
Make sure the hood is securely
latched.
LATCH
Before Driving
2. Put your fingers between the front
edge of the hood and the front
grille to locate the hood latch
handle. Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift the hood.
3. Lift the hood up most of the
way. The hydraulic supports will
lift it up the rest of the way and
hold it up.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
473
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:17:17 31TK4630_479
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 543 .
474
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:17:25 31TK4630_480
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
MAX
RESERVE TANK
To access the radiator reserve tank,
remove the right-side engine
compartment cover (see page 542 ).
See page 541 for the engine coolant
location.
Before Driving
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 539 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 546 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
475
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:17:37 31TK4630_481
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
City MPG
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
km) per year multiplied by the
cost per gallon (based on EPA
fuel cost data) divided by the
combined fuel economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
www.fueleconomy.gov
(Canada: Visit www. vehicles.gc.ca)
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
476
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:17:55 31TK4630_482
Fuel Economy
For example:
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
543).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multiinformation display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 539 ).
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
CONTINUED
477
2012 TL
Before Driving
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
11/01/14 19:18:08 31TK4630_483
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Before Driving
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
478
2012 TL
L per
100 km
11/01/14 19:18:19 31TK4630_484
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
non-Acura accessories, may make
your vehicle unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
Although non-Acura accessories may
fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 600 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
479
2012 TL
Before Driving
Accessories
Your dealer has Acura accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
11/01/14 19:18:29 31TK4630_485
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with nonAcura components could seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability.
Non-Acura wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with a nonAcura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Raising your vehicle with a nonAcura suspension kit can affect
the handling, stability, and
reliability.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
480
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:18:40 31TK4630_486
Carrying Cargo
DOOR POCKETS
CENTER POCKET
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
GLOVE BOX
Door and seat-back pockets
Center and side pockets
Console compartment
In addition, the trunk pass-through
allows you to carry longer items.
SIDE POCKET
TRUNK
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
481
2012 TL
Before Driving
Trunk
11/01/14 19:18:54 31TK4630_487
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
Before Driving
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
482
2012 TL
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
11/01/14 19:19:11 31TK4630_488
Carrying Cargo
Example 1
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)
Cargo Weight
250 lbs
(113 kg)
Example 3
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
trunk panel. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
CONTINUED
483
2012 TL
Before Driving
Example 2
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Both are on a label on the
driver's
’ doorjamb.
11/01/14 19:19:23 31TK4630_489
Carrying Cargo
Be sure items placed on the
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
floor pedals.
Before Driving
Keep all cargo below the bottom
of the windows. If it is higher, it
could interfere with the proper
operation of the side curtain
airbags.
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Cargo Hook Buttons
CARGO HOOK BUTTON
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 57 .
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Cargo hook buttons in the trunk
can be used to install a net for
securing items.
Cargo Nets
If equipped
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
484
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:19:27 31TK4630_490
Driving
Preparing to Drive ......................... 486
Starting the Engine
(Models without Keyless
Access System) ...................... 487
Starting the Engine
(Models with Keyless
Access System) ...................... 489
Manual Transmission.................... 491
Automatic Transmission............... 494
Driving with the Paddle
Shifters ........................................ 499
Super Handling-All Wheel
DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System .... 504
Parking ............................................ 506
Braking System.............................. 507
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 508
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ......... 510
Hill Start Assist .......................... 512
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 514
Blind Spot Information System
(BSI) ............................................ 519
Towing a Trailer ............................ 528
Towing Your Vehicle .................... 528
485
2012 TL
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the Super
Handling-All Wheel DriveTM
(SH-AWD ) system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA ), aka
electronic stability control (ESC),
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), and the blind spot
information system (BSI).
11/01/14 19:19:40 31TK4630_491
Preparing to Drive
You should do these checks and
adjustments before you drive your
vehicle:
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
6. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 161 ).
7. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 167 ).
8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 146 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
Driving
3. Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
9. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
10.Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 16 ).
5. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
486
2012 TL
11.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages 63 , 76 and
and 78 ).
11/01/14 19:19:49 31TK4630_492
Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:
1. Apply the parking brake.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
Driving
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. The starter
motor runs until the engine starts
or a maximum of 10−25 seconds
depending on engine coolant
temperature.
If the engine does not start, wait
at least 10 seconds before
trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 149 .
487
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:19:56 31TK4630_493
Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)
Check Starting System Message
If this message is on, the ignition
switch has to be held in the START
(III) position manually until the
engine starts. The ignition switch
can be held in that position up to 15
seconds.
Driving
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer.
If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON (II) position. You
will also see this message when the
auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.
488
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:20:10 31TK4630_494
Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you have
your keyless access remote and push
the engine start/stop button while
depressing the brake pedal (A/T) or
clutch pedal (M/T), this feature
keeps the engine’s starter motor
running until the engine starts.
Follow these instructions to start the
engine:
In either of the following cases, you
should insert the keyless access
remote into the keyless remote slot.
For more information, see pages
194 and 195 .
The keyless access remote system
main switch is off.
The keyless access remote battery
becomes weak or dead.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Manual transmission:
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The power mode from ON to
START does not function unless
the clutch pedal is pressed.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, push and release the engine
start/stop button. You do not need
to hold the engine start/stop
button to start the engine. The
starter motor runs until the engine
starts or a maximum of 10−25
seconds depending on engine
coolant temperature.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded keyless access remote (or other
device) is used, the engine’s f uel system
is disabled. For more inf ormation, see
page 149 .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
Automatic transmission:
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
489
2012 TL
Driving
1. Apply the parking brake.
If the engine does not start, wait
at least 10 seconds before
trying again.
11/01/14 19:20:25 31TK4630_495
Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)
Check Starting System Message
If this message is on, you should
press and hold the engine start/stop
button until the engine starts. The
engine start/stop button may need to
be held several seconds before the
starter motor runs. The starter
motor can be run up to 15 seconds.
Driving
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer.
If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display with the power mode ON.
You will also see this message when
the auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch to select the power mode. For
more information, see page 184 .
Emergency Engine Start
If you cannot start the engine using
the normal engine start procedure,
do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Automatic transmission:
Put the shift lever into Park.
3. Press the engine start/stop button
to turn on the ACCESSORY mode.
4. Press and hold the engine start/
stop button for about 15 seconds
while pressing the brake pedal
(automatic) or the clutch pedal
(manual).
Do not follow this procedure unless
it is a case of emergency. Even if you
can start the engine using this
method, the system may have a
malfunction. Contact your dealer as
soon as possible.
490
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:20:35 31TK4630_496
Manual Transmission
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
CONTINUED
491
2012 TL
Driving
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift from
any forward gear to reverse while
the vehicle is moving at a certain
speed (see page 493 ).
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift
into one of the forward gears for a
moment. This stops the
gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
11/01/14 19:20:43 31TK4630_497
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Driving
Shift up
Normal acceleration
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
17 mph (28 km/h)
27 mph (44 km/h)
36 mph (58 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
44 mph (71 km/h)
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
492
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:20:53 31TK4630_498
Manual Transmission
2. If you are still unable to shift to
reverse, apply the parking brake,
and select the ACCESSORY or
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode
(see page 185 ).
Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a
lockout so you cannot accidentally
shift from any forward gear to
reverse while the vehicle is moving
at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
to reverse when the vehicle is
stopped, do the following:
3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
reverse.
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
493
2012 TL
Driving
Move the shift lever in sequence.
4. With the clutch pedal still pressed
fully, press the engine start/stop
button to start the engine.
11/01/14 19:21:03 31TK4630_499
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Driving
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR on
PADDLE SHIFT MODE
These indicators between the
tachometer and speedometer show
which position the shift lever is in.
Using a paddle shift mode, the gear
position indicator shows you the
selected gear number (see page
page 499 ).
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch* to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
494
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 19:21:11 31TK4630_500
Automatic Transmission
Shifting
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to S
S to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
RELEASE BUTTON
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal, and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch* is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of
LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
495
2012 TL
Driving
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 497 .
11/01/14 19:21:19 31TK4630_501
Automatic Transmission
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting
into Park.
On models without
keyless access system
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Driving
On models with keyless access system
The shift lever must be in Park
before you change the power mode
from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and the release button on the
front of the shift lever to shift from
Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
496
2012 TL
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 6 gear) to
keep the engine at the best speed for
the driving conditions.
11/01/14 19:21:32 31TK4630_502
Automatic Transmission
With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page 501 .
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. On models without
keyless access system
The engine may cut in and out in R
position or depending on the road
condition, even when the engine
speed is lower than the tachometer’s
red zone. This is the engine’s
computer working to protect the
transmission.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
On models with
keyless access system
Remove the built-in key from the
keyless access remote (see
page 201 ).
CONTINUED
497
2012 TL
Driving
S Position (S) − To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. This position is similar
to D, except only gears from first to
fifth are selected. (When shifting up
automatically, the vehicle speed is
higher than when in the D position.)
The S position keeps the
transmission from cycling between
fourth, fifth and sixth gears in stopand-go driving.
11/01/14 19:21:41 31TK4630_503
Automatic Transmission
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SLOT
Driving
COVER
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover to prevent
scratches. Use a small flat-tip
screwdriver or metal fingernail file
to carefully pry up the edge of the
cover and remove it from the slot.
Vehicle without keyless access system
is shown.
4. Insert a key or built-in key in the
shift lock release slot.
5. Push down on the key or built-in
key while you press the release
button on the shift lever and move
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
498
2012 TL
6. Remove the key or built-in key
from the shift lock release slot,
then reinstall the cover. Make
sure the notch on the cover is on
the rear side. Press the brake
pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
11/01/14 19:21:51 31TK4630_504
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm.
Using the Paddle Shifters in the
D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
When you are driving in the D
position, you can shift the
transmission up or down manually
with the paddle shifters.
Driving
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Each time you pull + (right), the
transmission shifts to a higher gear.
Pull − (left) to downshift. You will
see the selected gear number on the
instrument panel.
To shift up or down, use the +
(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on
either side of the steering wheel.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.
CONTINUED
499
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:22:05 31TK4630_505
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
Driving
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as
in normal driving, the system
judges that you are driving at a
constant cruising speed without
using the paddle shifters. Under
these conditions, D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission automatically returns
to drive mode (D).
Hold the + paddle shifter for 2
seconds to return to drive mode (D).
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number disappears.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear if you do not accelerate.
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
gear up or down. If you want to shift
up or down more than two gears, pull
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
then pull it again.
The automatic transmission will not
allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear
position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear.
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher gear.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
500
2012 TL
You are trying to downshift from
second to first with the accelerator
pedal off.
When you depress the accelerator
pedal to the floor, the transmission
will downshift from second to first.
The transmission downshifts to first
gear and returns to drive mode (D)
when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop or the vehicle speed is
about 6 mph (10 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle
shift mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to drive
mode (D).
11/01/14 19:22:15 31TK4630_506
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
Using the Paddle Shifters in the S
position (Sequential Shift Mode)
With the shift lever in the S position,
you can select the sequential shift
mode to shift gears; much like a
manual transmission using the
paddle shifters, but without a
clutch pedal.
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ and pull either paddle
shifter, the gear position indicator
displays ‘‘M’’ along with the selected
gear number.
To upshift, pull the + (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the −
(left) paddle shifter.
CONTINUED
501
2012 TL
Driving
Shifting between first and second
gears may occur automatically.
Downshifting from second to first
with the accelerator pedal off is
not allowed.
To enter the sequential shift mode,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, move the lever to
the S position, then pull either paddle
shifter. To cancel the sequential shift
mode and return to the ordinary
automatic transmission, move the
shift lever from the S position. When
moving the shift lever, be careful not
to operate incorrectly. While you are
driving in the sequential shift mode,
the transmission will not
automatically return to ordinary
automatic transmission.
11/01/14 19:22:29 31TK4630_507
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
When you accelerate from a stop,
the transmission starts in first gear,
and shifts from first to second
automatically. You must manually
upshift between second and sixth
gears. Make sure you upshift before
the engine speed reaches the
tachometer’s red zone.
Driving
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (6, 5, 4, 3, or 2). There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
When you are driving, the
transmission downshifts to the lower
gear under the following conditions:
The automatic transmission will not
allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear
position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear.
If the vehicle speed decreases
below the redline of the selected
lower gear while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission
downshifts, and the indicator
displays the selected gear.
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher gear.
The vehicle slows down to a
certain speed.
You press the brake pedal.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
The vehicle detects that you are
driving uphill or downhill.
502
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:22:37 31TK4630_508
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
Starting in Second Gear
Recommended Shift Points
When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped,
pull the + (right) paddle shifter to
shift to second gear. You will see
‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting in
second gear helps to reduce
wheelspin in deep snow or on a
slippery surface.
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Normal acceleration
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h)
50 mph (81 km/h)
Driving
Shift up
503
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:22:46 31TK4630_509
Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System
If equipped
The super handling-all wheel drive
(SH-AWD) system is a full time allwheel-drive system that
automatically controls and transfers
varying amounts of engine torque to
all wheels independently, according
to the driving conditions.
Driving
While the SH-AWD system helps to
enhance the vehicle’s driving
stability in all situations, it is still
your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
SH-AWD Torque
Distribution Monitor
TORQUE INDICATOR
TORQUE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
The SH-AWD torque distribution
monitor on the multi-information
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel − right front (RF),
left front (LF), right rear (RR), ~~~~~~
and left rear (LR) − has its own
torque indicator.
504
2012 TL
Each torque indicator is displayed as
a bar graph divided into 5 segments.
The number of segments represents
the amount of torque distributed to
each wheel.
When there is only a slight change
in torque distribution while driving,
such as cruising on level roads at
the same speed, the torque
distribution monitor may stop
displaying the amount of torque.
This is not a system problem. The
monitor will show the amount if the
system senses any change
in torque distribution.
11/01/14 19:22:55 31TK4630_510
Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out. If the indicator does not go
out, take your vehicle to a dealer to
have it checked.
Your vehicle still has normal frontwheel drive with vehicle stability
assist (VSA), but does not have the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
as possible.
Driving
If the SH-AWD indicator begins to
blink while driving, it indicates the
differential temperature is too high.
You will also see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
multi-information display.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, park the vehicle
and shift to Park (automatic), and let
If the SH-AWD indicator on the
instrument panel stays on, and the
‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message also appears on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the SH-AWD system.
505
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:23:08 31TK4630_511
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Driving
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking
brake before you put the
transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and
putting pressure on the parking
mechanism in the transmission.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
506
2012 TL
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
On models with keyless access system
NOTE: If you are unable to stop the
engine normally when the vehicle is
parked (in the Park position on the
automatic transmission models), see
Emergency Engine Stop on
page 192 .
11/01/14 19:23:18 31TK4630_512
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Driving
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
507
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:23:27 31TK4630_513
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
Driving
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
When the ABS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 598 .
508
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:23:36 31TK4630_514
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 598 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss
of control.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel
or snow, than a vehicle without
anti- lock.
Driving
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
509
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:23:49 31TK4630_515
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering if the
vehicle turns more or less than
desired. It also assists you in
maintaining traction while
accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces. It does this by
regulating the engine’s output, and
by selectively applying the brakes.
Driving
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA system indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
VSA OFF Indicator
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA system indicator blink.
have the VSA system inspected by
your dealer.
NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
On models with SH-AWD
If this indicator comes on while
driving, you will also see a ‘‘CHECK
VSA SYSTEM’’ and/or ‘‘CHECK
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. Drive cautiously as the VSA
may not be functioning. Without
VSA, your vehicle will have normal
braking and cornering ability, but it
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. Also, the VSA
OFF switch will not operate. Pull to
the side of the road when it is safe,
and turn off the engine. Reset the
system by restarting the engine. If
the VSA system indicator stays on,
510
2012 TL
If there is a problem with the hill
start assist system, the VSA system
indicator comes on and stays on. The
multi-information display shows a
‘‘CHECK HILL START ASSIST
SYSTEM’’ message.
On models with keyless access system
With the VSA system indicator on,
you may not be able to stop the
engine even if you park the vehicle
safely. To stop the engine, see
Emergency Engine Stop on
page 192 .
11/01/14 19:23:59 31TK4630_516
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on (see page 514 ),
or the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message with the indicator flashing
(see page 517 ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even if the
VSA system is turned off with the
VSA OFF switch. In this case, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
VSA OFF SWITCH
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
The VSA switch location varies
on models.
Driving
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
VSA OFF Switch
U.S. Advance Package model is shown.
This switch is under the
driver’s side vent. To turn the VSA
system on and off, press and hold it
until you hear a beep.
CONTINUED
511
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:24:09 31TK4630_517
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if
you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
Driving
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 574 ).
Hill Start Assist
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would
if your vehicle was not equipped
wiht VSA.
To activate hill start assist, you must
come to a complete stop and make
sure the shift lever is either in D or S
when facing uphill, or reverse when
facing downhill. This feature begins
working a few seconds after you are
in the correct gear position. Release
the brake pedal. The brakes remain
engaged briefly to keep the vehicle
from rolling forward or backward.
Gently apply the accelerator pedal as
in normal driving. Hill start assist will
release brake pressure gradually as
you accelerate.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
512
2012 TL
On models with SH-AWD
Your vehicle is equipped with a hill
start assist feature to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling on inclines
as you move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator.
11/01/14 19:24:17 31TK4630_518
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Hill start assist may not prevent your
vehicle from rolling downhill on a
very steep or slippery slope, and will
not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement
for the parking brake. If parking
your vehicle, ensure that the
transmission is in park, and/or the
parking brake is fully applied before
exiting the vehicle. For vehicles with
manual transmission, it is
recommended that you turn off the
engine before exiting the vehicle.
If the VSA system indicator comes
on with a ‘‘CHECK HILL START
ASSIST SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display, there may
be a problem with the hill start assist.
The VSA also may not function.
Have your vehicle inspected by your
dealer.
Hill start assist will still operate even
when VSA is switched off.
Driving
On manual transmission models:
You must come to a complete stop,
press the clutch pedal, and shift to
first gear when facing uphill, or
reverse when facing downhill.
Release the brake pedal. The brakes
remain engaged briefly to keep the
vehicle from rolling forward or
backward while you move your foot
from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal. Gently apply the
accelerator pedal while
simultaneously releasing the clutch
pedal, as in normal driving. Hill start
assist will release brake pressure
gradually as you accelerate.
Hill start assist will also hold braking
briefly if you select the neutral gear
position with the clutch pedal
depressed when facing uphill.
513
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:24:27 31TK4630_519
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Driving
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low, the sensor in that
tire immediately sends a signal that
causes the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator in the instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, you will see
which tire is losing pressure on the
multi-information display along with
a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
You should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure
as indicated on the vehicle’s tire
information placard.
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
514
2012 TL
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure shown on the driver’s
doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 583 ).
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
11/01/14 19:24:39 31TK4630_520
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Tire Pressure Monitor
U.S.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
in the owner’s manual (see
page 570 ).
Example: Technology Package is
shown.
To select the tire pressure monitor,
press the INFO button several times
with the ignition switch* in the ON
(II) position or with the power mode
ON.
You will see the above display on the
multi-information display when each
tire pressure is normal.
Refer to page 568 for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 517 ).
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
515
Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
you check and adjust your tire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
11/01/14 19:24:49 31TK4630_521
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Canada
Driving
Example: Technology Package is
shown.
Each tire pressure is shown in PSI
(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian
models).
This shows that the front left tire is
losing pressure.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low, the sensor in that
tire immediately sends a signal that
causes the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator in the instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, you will
see which tire is losing pressure
on the multi-information display
along with a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message.
516
2012 TL
U.S. model
Canadian model
If any of the tires has low pressure,
the tire pressure monitor also shows
the above message and each tire
pressure to warn you about the low
tire pressure when you select the
display by pressing the INFO button
several times.
11/01/14 19:25:00 31TK4630_522
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure
Canadian model
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor shows a
‘‘TPMS ERROR’’ message and the
tire pressure readings are not
displayed. If this happens, you will
first see a system warning message
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ on the
multi-information display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page 515 ).
517
2012 TL
Driving
U.S. model
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page 511 ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
11/01/14 19:25:11 31TK4630_523
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator and tire
monitor indicator will come on.
Replace the indicated flat tire with
the compact spare tire (see
page 583 ).
Driving
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the
spare tire pressure. Manually check
the spare tire pressure to be sure it
is correct.
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator and the low tire position on
the low tire pressure monitor do not
go out after inflating the tires to the
specified values, have your dealer
check the system as soon as possible.
518
2012 TL
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
11/01/14 19:25:18 31TK4630_524
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
Failure to visually confirm that it
is safe to change lanes before
doing so may result in a crash
and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind
spot information system when
changing lanes.
If equipped
The blind spot information system
(BSI) is designed to assist you when
you are changing lanes.
If the system detects vehicles in
adjacent lanes, it automatically
illuminates the appropriate indicator
to provide assistance when you
change lanes. It is not a substitute
for visual confirmation that it is safe
to change lanes.
519
2012 TL
Driving
Always look in your mirrors, to
either side of your vehicle, and
behind you for other vehicles
before changing lanes.
11/01/14 19:25:29 31TK4630_525
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
When BSI detects a vehicle in an
alert zone, a BSI alert indicator
comes on near the corresponding
outside rearview mirror.
BSI System Operation
ALERT
ZONE
A
B
Driving
C
A: Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
BSI system is designed to detect
vehicles in specified alert zones
adjacent to your vehicle, particularly
in harder to see areas commonly
known as ‘‘blind spots.’’
While your vehicle is moving
forward at a speed between 6 mph
(10 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h),
the BSI alert indicator comes on
under either of the following
conditions:
Another vehicle overtakes you,
entering the alert zone from
behind, at a speed that differs
from your vehicle’s speed by no
more than 31 mph (50 km/h).
You pass a vehicle at a speed that
differs from that vehicle’s speed
by no more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator comes on
approximately 2 seconds after the
vehicle enters the alert zone.
520
2012 TL
The system will not alert you to all
vehicles in blind spot zones (such as
vehicles you have just passed which
you should already be aware of)
unless it remains in the alert zone for
approximately 2 or more seconds.
While the system is on, BSI is active
whenever the shift lever is in the D
or S position.
11/01/14 19:25:35 31TK4630_526
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
BSI INDICATOR
Driving
BSI ALERT INDICATOR
BSI OFF BUTTON
LEFT SIDE
RIGHT SIDE
U.S. model is shown.
CONTINUED
521
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:25:43 31TK4630_527
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
LEVER
Impacts to the radar sensors or the
area around them can affect
system performance. If an impact
occurs, have the system checked
by your dealer.
ALERT INDICATOR
ILLUMINATE
BLINK
Driving
The BSI alert indicator starts to blink
as a reminder if you move the turn
signal lever in the direction of the
detected vehicle.
Radar sensors, located underneath
each corner of the rear bumper,
detect objects. Do not cover this
area with labels or stickers of any
kind. Always keep this area free of
any kind of dirt every time you get
in the vehicle.
522
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:25:55 31TK4630_528
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
Important Precautions
Like all assistance systems, BSI has
limitations. Over-reliance on BSI may
result in a collision. Always look in
your mirrors, to either side of your
vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Limitations
The BSI alert indicators may not
illuminate under the following
circumstances:
The speed difference between
your vehicle and a vehicle
approaching from behind is
greater than 31 mph (50 km/h).
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
When objects such as guard rails,
poles, trees, etc., are detected.
When an object that doesn’t
reflect radio waves well, such as a
motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
A vehicle is behind or approaching
your vehicle while on a curved
road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane
to the adjacent lane.
An object not detected by the
radar sensors approaches or
passes your vehicle.
CONTINUED
523
2012 TL
Driving
The speed difference between
your vehicle and the vehicle you
are passing is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
BSI may be adversely affected under
the following circumstances:
11/01/14 19:26:04 31TK4630_529
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
EXAMPLES
GUARD RAIL
POLE OR TREE
MOTORCYCLE
Driving
: BSI Alert indicator is on
: BSI Alert indicator is off
The system picks up external
electrical interference.
The orientation of the sensors has
been changed.
The rear bumper has been
deformed, or improperly repaired.
Bad weather conditions, such as
heavy rain, snow and fog.
524
2012 TL
The system is for your convenience.
Even if an object is within the alert
zone, the system may not detect it,
depending on its shape.
Always look in your mirrors, to
either side of your vehicle, and
behind you for other vehicles before
changing lanes.
11/01/14 19:26:13 31TK4630_530
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI OFF Button
To turn the system off, press and
hold the BSI OFF button when the
ignition switch* is in the ON (II)
position. The BSI indicator on the
instrument panel glows amber,
indicating that the system is turned
off. The multi-information display
indicates that the system is off.
Driving
U.S. model is shown.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
Canadian model is shown.
To turn the system on again, press
and hold the same button. The BSI
indicator on the instrument panel
turns off. The multi-information
display indicates that the system is
on.
When the ignition switch* is turned
to the ON (II) position, the system
will be in the previously selected ON
or OFF setting.
525
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:26:25 31TK4630_531
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI Status Displays
System
Status
Multi-Information
Display Message
ON
−
OFF
Description
BSI Indicator
When you press and hold the BSI OFF button with the ignition switch*1 in the ON (II) position, a
BSI ON or OFF message is displayed on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds.
The BSI indicator will remain on while the system is off.
The BSI alert indicator illuminates or flashes according to the system status.
A chime sounds to indicate that the system has been turned ON or OFF.
*1: ON mode on models with keyless access system (see pages 184 and 187).
Driving
If while driving, mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sensor:
The system may shut down
The BSI indicator illuminates, a message is displayed on the multi-information display, and a
chime sounds.
ON/OFF
*2
The BSI indicator will turn off and the system will return to normal once the obstacle is removed,
and you begin to drive.
Always keep the area around the radar sensors clean. BSI may not operate properly if the sensors
are obstructed.
The BSI alert indicator:
May come on when a vehicle enters one of the alert zones, even if this message is displayed.
May not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even if this message is not displayed.
*2 : System status may remain on even when the BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE message is displayed.
OFF
If the system is faulty, the BSI indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multiinformation display.
Have your vehicle inspected by your Acura dealer.
526
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:26:30 31TK4630_532
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Driving
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
527
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:26:36 31TK4630_533
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 607 .
Driving
528
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:26:43 31TK4630_534
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
Maintenance Minder messages on
the multi-information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
529
2012 TL
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 633 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 530
Maintenance MinderTM.................. 531
Fluid Locations............................... 541
Engine Compartment Covers....... 542
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 543
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 544
Engine Coolant ............................... 546
Windshield Washers ..................... 548
Transmission Fluid ........................ 549
Automatic Transmission........... 549
Manual Transmission ............... 551
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 553
Timing Belt ..................................... 554
Lights .............................................. 555
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 564
Floor Mats ...................................... 565
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 566
Exterior Care.................................. 566
Wiper Blades .................................. 566
Tires ................................................ 568
Checking the Battery .................... 577
Vehicle Storage .............................. 578
Interior Care ................................... 579
11/01/14 19:26:56 31TK4630_535
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
Maintenance
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
530
2012 TL
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
11/01/14 19:27:06 31TK4630_536
Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the multi-information display to show
you when you should have your
dealer perform engine oil
replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
Engine Oil Life Display
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
U.S. model is shown.
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life
displayed on the multi-information
display, turn the ignition switch* to
the ON (II) position, and press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life is displayed.
CONTINUED
531
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:27:17 31TK4630_537
Maintenance MinderTM
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the multi-information
display according to this table:
Maintenance
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100% − 91%
90% − 81%
80% − 71%
70% − 61%
60% − 51%
50% − 41%
40% − 31%
30% − 21%
20% − 16%
15% − 11%
10% − 6%
5% − 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page 72 ).
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) indicating
the main and sub items required at
the time of the oil change. Refer to
page 540 for a complete list of the
maintenance main items and sub
items.
532
2012 TL
The message appears on the multiinformation display each time you
turn the ignition switch* to the ON
(II) position.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 19:27:24 31TK4630_538
Maintenance MinderTM
This message reminds you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
MAIN ITEM(S)
SUB ITEM(S)
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1
percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the same
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ was displayed with. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed as
soon as possible.
CONTINUED
533
2012 TL
Maintenance
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life information. Along
with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, you
will see the percentage of the
remaining engine oil life and the
maintenance item codes on the
multi-information display.
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM CODE SUB ITEM CODE(S)
11/01/14 19:27:31 31TK4630_539
Maintenance MinderTM
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Maintenance
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
1 to 5 percent (see page 532 ).
534
2012 TL
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0%, the multiinformation display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code(s).
This message is displayed when the
total distance traveled is less than 10
miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0%.
11/01/14 19:27:42 31TK4630_540
Maintenance MinderTM
These messages will come on every
time you turn the ignition switch* to
the ON (II) position.
U.S.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 537 .
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE
TRAVELED
MAINTENANCE CODES
Canada
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
CONTINUED
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
535
Maintenance
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
0 to 1 percent.
11/01/24 17:04:47 31TK4630_541
Maintenance MinderTM
This message is displayed again
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0% message.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 537 .
Maintenance
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
U.S.
TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE
TRAVELED
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
Canada
When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life,
the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with
the maintenance item code(s) and
the total negative distance traveled
after the oil life became 0%, will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
536
2012 TL
All maintenance items shown on the
multi-information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 540 .
11/01/14 19:28:02 31TK4630_542
Maintenance MinderTM
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch* to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the Maintenance Minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch* to the
ON (II) position.
2. If the engine oil life is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly.
2012 TL
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO (▲) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to reset the
engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
537
Maintenance
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.
11/01/14 19:28:10 31TK4630_543
Maintenance MinderTM
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Maintenance
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all receipts
as proof of completion, and have the
person who does the work fill out
your Maintenance Journal or
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check
your warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Acura parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
538
2012 TL
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the multiinformation display.
11/01/14 19:28:20 31TK4630_544
Maintenance MinderTM
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 474 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 475 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 555 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See
page 549 .
Maintenance
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 553 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See
page 568 .
CONTINUED
539
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:28:31 31TK4630_545
Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Symbol
1
2
3
4
*1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 538 .
NOTE:
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake
fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
5
6
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace transmission and transfer fluid*2
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under
−20°F, −29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/
100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid*2
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds results in higher level of mechanical (shear)
stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the differential
fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*2 : SH-AWD only
540
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:28:36 31TK4630_546
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID*
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Black cap)
CLUTCH FLUID*
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP*
*: Located under the cover
541
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:28:46 31TK4630_547
Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by
several covers. You may need to
remove the covers when you
perform some simple maintenance
work.
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
COVER
To remove the covers:
1. Remove the right and left engine
compartment covers by sliding
them apart.
BULKHEAD COVER
Maintenance
2. Pull the bulkhead cover straight
up to remove. When removing the
cover, make sure to move the
bulkhead cover slightly to the left
so that the hood latch handle does
not get in the way.
After replacing the right engine
compartment cover, make sure the
washer fluid cap is firmly in place.
When reinstalling the covers, make
sure the pins and tabs are in their
proper positions.
542
2012 TL
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER
11/01/14 19:28:57 31TK4630_548
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
2WD models:
Acura Motor Oil is the preferred
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.
0W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Maintenance
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Install the engine oil
fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait
a few minutes, and recheck the oil
level (see page 474 ). Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
CONTINUED
543
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:29:07 31TK4630_549
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
SH-AWD models:
Acura Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. 5W20 oil is formulated for year-round
protection of your vehicle to improve
cold weather starting and fuel
economy.
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the multiinformation display.
Changing the Engine
Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.
Ambient Temperature
544
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:29:21 31TK4630_550
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
DRAIN BOLT
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
WASHER
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
OIL FILTER
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
6. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Maintenance
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
CONTINUED
545
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:29:32 31TK4630_551
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine and check your work.
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Maintenance
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
MAX
MIN
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
To access the radiator reserve tank,
remove the right-side engine
compartment cover (see page 542 ).
546
2012 TL
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as
a temporary replacement. Make sure
it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon
as possible.
11/01/14 19:29:45 31TK4630_552
Engine Coolant
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
RADIATOR CAP
1. Remove all engine compartment
covers (see page 542 ).
2. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
5. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
7. Reinstall the engine compartment
covers.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
547
2012 TL
Maintenance
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
11/01/14 19:29:55 31TK4630_553
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
On Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOW
WASHER FLUID’’ message appears
on the multi-information display.
On U.S. models
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Maintenance
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
TUBE
To check washer fluid level, cover
the reservoir cap center hole with
your finger while lifting the cap and
the attached measuring tube. The
washer fluid level in the tube will
indicate the washer fluid level in the
reservoir.
548
2012 TL
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
11/01/14 19:30:06 31TK4630_554
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
GUIDE
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
DIPSTICK
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
CONTINUED
549
2012 TL
Maintenance
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
11/01/14 19:30:15 31TK4630_555
Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Acura ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid).
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the Maintenance MinderTM (see
page 531 ).
Maintenance
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
550
2012 TL
Use only Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission f luid). Do not mix with
other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Acura ATF DW-1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Acura
ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Acura
new vehicle warranty.
11/01/14 19:30:26 31TK4630_556
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission
CHECK BOLT
FILLER BOLT
WASHER
Remove the check bolt and look for
transmission fluid coming out of the
bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
the check bolt.
If no fluid comes out, remove the
filler bolt and washer. Slowly add
Acura Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the
check bolt hole.
To check the transmission fluid level,
remove the mounting bolts and the
under cover holding clips, then pull
out the driver’s side under cover
carefully.
CONTINUED
551
2012 TL
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.
11/01/14 19:30:35 31TK4630_557
Transmission Fluid
Pour the fluid into the filler hole
slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Let the fluid run out until it stops,
then reinstall the check bolt and the
filler bolt.
Make sure to put a new washer on
each bolt when reinstalling it.
Reinstall the under cover, tighten the
mounting bolts securely, then put
the holding clips back in place. Make
sure the under cover is installed
under the edge of the front bumper.
Maintenance
If Acura MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification Seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
552
2012 TL
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the Maintenance MinderTM (see
page 531 ).
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
11/01/14 19:30:47 31TK4630_558
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly. There are up to
two reservoirs, depending on the
model. They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission models
only)
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Independent of the Maintenance
Minder information, replace the
brake fluid every 3 years.
Brake Fluid
MAX
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
You need to remove the left engine
compartment cover to check the
fluid level (see page 542 ).
553
2012 TL
Maintenance
To access the reservoirs, remove the
left engine compartment cover (see
page 542 ).
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
11/01/14 19:30:58 31TK4630_559
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Timing Belt
Clutch Fluid
Manual Transmission only
MAX
Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
according to the Maintenance
MinderTM (see page 531 ).
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
(Canada) if you regularly drive your
vehicle in any of the following
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
Maintenance
MIN
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
554
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:31:11 31TK4630_560
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
HOLDING CLIP
If you are replacing the bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
holding clips with a flat-tip
screwdriver. Then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct by
pulling it straight up.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove all engine compartment
covers (see page 542 ).
CONTINUED
555
2012 TL
Maintenance
Low Beam Headlight Bulb
Replacement
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed (or the vehicle
is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode
on models with keyless access
system). Because of this, you
should not attempt to examine or
change a low beam headlight
bulb yourself. If a low beam
headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle
to your dealer to have it replaced.
Replacing a High Beam
Headlight/Daytime Running
Light Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen high beam
headlight bulbs which are also used
for the daytime running light.
Handle it by its base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
11/01/14 19:31:25 31TK4630_561
Lights
RESERVE TANK
6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
BULB
7. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
8. (Driver’s side)
Install the upper part of the air
intake duct securely. Reinstall the
holding clips.
STAY
Maintenance
To change a bulb on the
passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.
CONNECTOR
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
556
2012 TL
9. (Passenger’s side)
Install the engine coolant reserve
tank.
10.Install all engine compartment
covers.
11/01/14 19:31:36 31TK4630_562
Lights
Replacing the Front
Side Marker Light Bulb
HOLDING CLIP
BOLT
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
HOLDING CLIP
3. Use a wrench to remove the
mounting bolts, and remove the
holding clip with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
4. Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
CONTINUED
557
2012 TL
Maintenance
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clips from the
edge of the inner fender cover,
and pull the inner fender cover
back.
BOLT
UNDER COVER
11/01/14 19:31:47 31TK4630_563
Lights
BULB
SOCKET
7. Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
8. Insert the socket into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
9. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Maintenance
5. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
10.Push the under cover in place and
set the inner fender cover in the
original position. Install the bolts
and tighten them securely. Insert
each holding clip, and lock it by
pushing on its center.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its socket.
558
2012 TL
Replacing a Front Turn
Signal/Parking Light Bulb
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
11/01/14 19:31:58 31TK4630_564
Lights
HOLDING CLIP
COVER
BOLT
HOLDING CLIP
3. Use a wrench to remove the
mounting bolts, and remove the
holding clip with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
BULB
SOCKET
4. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its socket.
CONTINUED
559
2012 TL
Maintenance
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clips from the
edge of the inner fender cover,
and pull the inner fender cover
back.
BOLT
UNDER COVER
11/01/14 19:32:08 31TK4630_565
Lights
6. Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
7. Insert the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Maintenance
9. Push the under cover in place and
set the inner fender cover in the
original position. Install the bolts
and tighten them securely. Insert
each holding clip, and lock it by
pushing on its center.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
The fog lights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
560
2012 TL
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
11/01/14 19:32:20 31TK4630_566
Lights
HOLDING CLIP
COVER
BULB
BOLT
HOLDING CLIP
3. Use a wrench to remove the
mounting bolts, and remove the
holding clip with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
CONNECTOR
4. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
5. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
561
2012 TL
Maintenance
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clips from the
edge of the inner fender cover,
and pull the inner fender cover
back.
BOLT
UNDER COVER
11/01/14 19:32:31 31TK4630_567
Lights
6. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
SCREW
7. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
8. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
Maintenance
9. Push the under cover in place and
set the inner fender cover in the
original position. Install the bolts
and tighten them securely. Insert
each holding clip, and lock it by
pushing on its center.
NUTS
1. Open the trunk.
Remove the screw in the center of
the holding clip on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
562
2012 TL
2. Remove the nuts from the stud
bolts with a socket or wrench.
11/01/14 19:32:42 31TK4630_568
Lights
6. Push a new bulb straight into the
socket until it bottoms, and
reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
BULB SOCKET
4. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: back-up light,
turn signal, or side marker.
9. Put the holding clip into the hole
on the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screw.
5. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
563
2012 TL
Maintenance
3. Pull the taillight assembly straight
back out of the body.
8. Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
11/01/14 19:32:52 31TK4630_569
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Side Turn Signal Lights
Each outside mirror has side turn
signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
Cleaning the Seat Belts
OPENING
High-mount Brake Light
This light should be replaced by your
dealer.
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
564
2012 TL
Dirt build-up around the openings of
the seat belt anchors can cause the
belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
openings with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
11/01/14 19:33:02 31TK4630_570
Floor Mats
DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT
FLOOR MAT ANCHORS
REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT
FLOOR MAT ANCHOR
Unlock
Unlock
Make sure the rear floor mats are
also properly hooked. If not, the floor
mat will interfere with the seat
operation and make the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
Lock
Lock
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
Maintenance
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats
from sliding forward (possibly
interfering with the pedals), or
backwards (making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective).
If you use non-Acura floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
To lock or unlock each anchor, turn
the knob.
565
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:33:12 31TK4630_571
Dust and Pollen Filter, Exterior Care, Wiper Blades
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate control
system.
Maintenance
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multiinformation display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the climate control system becomes
less than usual.
Exterior Care
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your vehicle.
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
566
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:33:24 31TK4630_572
Wiper Blades
BLADE
LOCK TAB
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
REINFORCEMENT STRIP
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
4. Examine the new wiper blades.
If they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the
new blade.
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
567
2012 TL
Maintenance
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
BLADE
11/01/14 19:33:32 31TK4630_573
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Maintenance
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 514 for
more information on the TPMS.
568
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:33:39 31TK4630_574
Tires
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
If you check air pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look
closely for punctures if a tire
starts losing pressure.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire
problem and not due to a
variation between gauges.
Maintenance
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.
569
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:33:56 31TK4630_575
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
TL and TL with Technology
Package models
Tire Size
P245/50R17 98V
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
Maintenance
TL with Advance Package
and Canadian Elite Package models
Tire Size
P245/45R18 96V
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
SH-AWD and SH-AWD with
Technology Package models
Tire Size
P245/45R18 96V
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
SH-AWD with Advance Package
and Canadian SH-AWD Elite
Package models
Tire Size
P245/40R19 94V
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 34 psi (235 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
Rear:
34 psi (235 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
570
2012 TL
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information,
see page 619 .
11/01/14 19:34:11 31TK4630_576
Tires
High Speed Driving
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds, be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressures as shown below. If you do
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.
For speeds over 118 mph
or 190 km/h:
Tire Size
P245/45R18 96V
For speeds over 99 mph
or 160 km/h:
Tire Size
P245/40R19 94V
Cold Tire Pressure for
High Speed Driving
Front: 39 psi (270 kPa ,
2.7 kgf/cm )
Rear:
39 psi (270 kPa ,
2.7 kgf/cm )
TL and TL with Technology
Package models
Tire pressure for high speed driving
is the same as for normal driving.
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Cold Tire Pressure for
High Speed Driving
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
CONTINUED
571
2012 TL
Maintenance
TL with Advance Package, Canadian
Elite Package, SH-AWD, and SH-AWD
with Technology Package models
SH-AWD with Advance Package
and Canadian SH-AWD Elite
Package models
11/01/14 19:34:21 31TK4630_577
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
Maintenance
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
Tire Maintenance
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
572
2012 TL
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 619 ).
11/01/14 19:34:34 31TK4630_578
Tires
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the multi-information display. Move
the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are
rotated. If you purchase directional
tires, rotate only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
CONTINUED
573
2012 TL
Maintenance
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Tire Rotation
11/01/14 19:34:46 31TK4630_579
Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Maintenance
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
Wheels:
On 2WD Models
17 x 8.0J (TPMS)
18 x 8.0J (TPMS)*
On SH-AWD Models
18 x 8.0J (TPMS)
19 x 8.0J (TPMS)*
Tires:
On 2WD Models
P245/50R17 98V
P245/45R18 96V *
On SH-AWD Models
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
P245/45R18 96V
P245/40R19 94V *
*: Advance Package and
Canadian Elite Package
See page 617 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
619 for tire size information.
574
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:34:59 31TK4630_580
Tires
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Tire Chains
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, we strongly recommend
using this Quality Chain Corp. tire
chain:
This tire chain is available at many
auto supply stores. To find a local
store that carries the chain, call
Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.
To order the tire chain online, go to
www.qualitychaincorp.com, and enter
your vehicle information. When you
install the chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with the chains installed.
*: Rubber chain adjusters, or tensioners,
must be used to prevent the chains from
contacting the body or the chassis.
CONTINUED
575
2012 TL
Maintenance
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires. Do not use chains on the
rear tires.
Premium Cobra Cable Chain
#1042P with accessory
adjusters*
11/01/14 19:35:07 31TK4630_581
Tires
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Maintenance
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Remove the chains as soon as you
begin driving on cleared roads.
576
2012 TL
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
11/01/14 19:35:18 31TK4630_582
Checking the Battery
The sensor on the negative terminal
monitors your vehicle’s battery
condition.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK BATTERY
SENSOR’’ message on the multiinformation display. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer.
To see the battery label, remove the
left side engine compartment cover
(see page 542 ).
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder) after
removing all engine compartment
covers (see page 542 ). To remove
corrosion, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
CONTINUED
577
2012 TL
Maintenance
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your Acura dealer or a
qualified technician.
11/01/14 19:35:33 31TK4630_583
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
On models without navigation system
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page 391 .
Maintenance
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio, you will
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see
page 390 ).
On models with navigation system
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you set
to the ON mode, the system will
require you to enter a PIN before it
can be used. Refer to the navigation
system manual.
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Fill the fuel tank.
Disconnect the battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
578
2012 TL
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
11/01/14 19:35:39 31TK4630_584
Vehicle Storage, Interior Care
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Leather
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay close
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with a 90% water and 10%
neutral soap solution. Then buff it
with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any
dust or dirt on leather surfaces
immediately.
Maintenance
579
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:35:42 31TK4630_585
580
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:35:47 31TK4630_586
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 582
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 583
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 588
Jump Starting ................................. 591
If the Engine Overheats ............... 593
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 595
Charging System Indicator........... 596
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 597
Brake System Indicator ................ 598
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 599
Fuses ............................................... 600
Fuse Locations ............................... 604
Emergency Towing ....................... 607
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 609
Taking Care of the Unexpected
581
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:35:58 31TK4630_587
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
After several miles (kilometers)
driving with the spare, this
indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 517 ).
582
2012 TL
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement tire should be the same
size and design, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
11/01/14 19:36:08 31TK4630_588
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
pull over safely. Drive slowly along
the shoulder until you get to an area
far away from traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch* to
the LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor lid by lifting up on the back
edge.
* : Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
For more information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
583
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
11/01/14 19:36:19 31TK4630_589
Changing a Flat Tire
JACK
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
EXTENSION
4. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
6. Take the jack out of the tool kit
case.
7. Place blocks in front and back of
the wheel diagonally opposite the
tire you are changing.
584
2012 TL
JACKING POINTS
9. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
11/01/14 19:36:27 31TK4630_590
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
11.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
12.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
CONTINUED
585
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
10.Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
11/01/14 19:36:35 31TK4630_591
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
14. Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
16.Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
586
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:36:50 31TK4630_592
Changing a Flat Tire
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
For normal
tire
For compact
spare tire
SPACER CONE
17.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
TAB
To remove the spacer cone,
squeeze the tabs on the wing bolt
to disengage it from the center of
the spacer cone, then pull the bolt
downward.
To install the wing bolt to the
spacer cone, reverse this
procedure.
19.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
21.Store the center cap in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
22.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 518 ).
587
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
18.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
20.Store the jack and tools in the tool
kit case. Place the tool kit case in
the flat tire.
11/01/14 19:37:00 31TK4630_593
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position or on models with keyless
access system, press the engine
start/stop button to set START
Mode (see page 184 ):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position or on
models with keyless access system,
press the engine start/stop button to
set START Mode (see page 184 ),
you do not hear the normal noise of
the engine trying to start. You may
hear a clicking sound, a series of
clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
588
2012 TL
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or on models with
keyless access system, press the
engine start/stop button to set ON
Mode (see page 184 ). Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 591 .
11/01/14 19:37:08 31TK4630_594
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position or on models
with keyless access system, press
the engine start/stop button to set
START Mode (see page 184 ). If
the headlights do not dim, check
the condition of the fuses. If the
fuses are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 607 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 577 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
591 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position or on models with keyless
access system, press the engine
start/stop button to set START
Mode (see page 184 ), but the engine
does not run.
CONTINUED
589
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Are you using a properly coded
key or keyless access remote (on
models with keyless access
system)? An improperly coded key
or keyless access remote will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 65 ).
11/01/14 19:37:18 31TK4630_595
If the Engine Won’t Start
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on pages 487 and 489 .
You may need to hold the start/
stop button down or hold the key
in the START (III) position until
the engine starts. It can be held
for up to 15 seconds.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the warning indicator may
not be working.
On models with keyless access system
Do you have your keyless access
system remote with you? The
vehicle will not start without the
remote within operating range and
with the keyless access main
switch in the glove box turned on.
NOTE: If you are unable to stop the
engine normally while in the Park
position, see Emergency Engine
Stop on page 192 .
Taking Care of the Unexpected
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 600 ).
590
2012 TL
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 607 .
11/01/14 19:37:29 31TK4630_596
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical
accessories: climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in neutral (manual)
or Park (automatic), and set the
parking brake.
BATTERY TERMINAL COVER
3. Pull up the battery terminal cover
to remove. The battery terminal
cover can be removed without
removing the left side engine
compartment cover.
CONTINUED
591
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or like ice, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
11/01/14 19:37:41 31TK4630_597
Jump Starting
7. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
8. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
BOOSTER
BATTERY
9. Install the battery terminal cover.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
4. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
5. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the engine hanger as
shown. Do not connect this jumper
cable to any other part of the
engine.
6. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
592
2012 TL
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
11/01/14 19:37:54 31TK4630_598
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMP
HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 77 ).
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 607 ).
CONTINUED
593
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
11/01/14 19:38:04 31TK4630_599
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark
(see Adding Engine Coolant on
page 546 ).
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before
checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down
on the cap, and turn it until it
comes off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
interior temperature to maximum
heat (each temperature control
sets to ‘‘
’’). Add coolant to
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. If you do not have the
594
2012 TL
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture
as soon as you can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 607 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back
on tightly.
11/01/14 19:38:13 31TK4630_600
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
1. Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 474 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The indicator notifies you of low oil
pressure and does not measure the
oil level. Check your vehicle’s oil
level at each refueling.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on
page 607 ).
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 543 ).
595
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:38:20 31TK4630_601
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you see a ‘‘REPLACE BATTERY’’
message on the multi-information
display, along with this indicator on,
you may need to replace the battery.
Have your vehicle’s battery checked
and replaced by your dealer.
596
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:38:32 31TK4630_602
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Readiness Code
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes may be erased. It takes
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
CONTINUED
597
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
11/01/14 19:38:43 31TK4630_603
Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position (set the power mode to ON,
on models with keyless access
system), without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 626 ).
U.S.
Canada
Brake System
Indicator
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch* to the ON (II) position, and
as a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 553 ).
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does
not feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down,
and you will have to press harder
on the pedal.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display when this
indicator comes on.
598
2012 TL
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
11/01/14 19:38:54 31TK4630_604
Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired by
your dealer as soon as possible (see
Emergency Towing on page 607 ).
Opening the Fuel Fill
Door Manually
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
MAINTENANCE LID
To open the fuel fill door, pull the
release lever rearward.
If the fuel fill door release button
does not work, use the release lever
inside the left maintenance lid in the
trunk.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
RELEASE LEVER
If you also cannot unlock the trunk
due to the power door lock system
malfunction, see page 155 and open
the trunk manually.
599
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:39:05 31TK4630_605
Fuses
DRIVER’S SIDE
PASSENGER’S SIDE
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
FUSE LABEL
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is located
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached
under the steering column.
AIR CLEANER HOUSING
NOTCH
The passenger’s side interior fuse
box is on the lower passenger’s side
panel. To remove the fuse box lid,
put your finger in the notch on the
lid, and pull it upward slightly, then
pull it toward you and take it out of
its hinges.
To access the fuse box, turn the
knob on the under cover one-quarter
turn and pull the front of the cover
straight down to remove it from the
dashboard.
600
2012 TL
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side next to the air cleaner
housing.
To access the under-hood fuse box,
remove the left-side engine
compartment cover (see page 542 ).
11/01/14 19:39:15 31TK4630_606
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
604 , 605 and 606 , or the diagram on
the fuse box lid or the fuse label,
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch* to the
LOCK (0) position.
Make sure the headlights and all
other accessories are off.
FUSE
BLOWN
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
* : Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button
instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
For more information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
601
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
11/01/14 19:39:22 31TK4630_607
Fuses
BLOWN
Also check the combined fuse box in
the under-hood fuse box.
FUSE PULLER
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided on the back of the
under-hood fuse box cover.
602
2012 TL
BLOWN
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
11/01/14 19:39:31 31TK4630_608
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket).
FUSE PULLER
SPARE FUSES
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
603
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
back of the under-hood fuse box
cover.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
Replace the fuse with one of the
correct rating as soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
11/01/14 19:39:42 31TK4630_609
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
1−1 120 A
1−2 40 A
2−1 70 A
2−2 40 A
2−3 30 A
2−4 40 A
2−5
2−6
30 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
Battery
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
EPS
ABS/VSA MTR
ABS/VSA
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
Option
Headlight Washer*3
SH-AWD*1
No. Amps.
3−1
3−2
3−3
3−4
3−5
3−6
3−7
3−8
50 A
40 A
30 A
60 A
40 A*1
30 A*2
30 A
30 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
IG Main
Sub Fan Motor*1
Sub Fan Motor*2
Driver’s Side Fuse Box
Main Fan Motor
Driver’s Side Light Main
Wiper Motor
Passenger’s Side Light Main
604
2012 TL
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
40 A
−
−
−
40 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Rear Defroster
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Heater Motor
Hazard
Horn and Stop
Keyless Access System*1
BMS (Battery Management
System)
IG Coil
FI Sub
Back Up
Interior Lights
FI Main
DBW
Back Up FI ECU
MG Clutch
Radiator Fan Timer
*1 : Used on SH-AWD models
*2 : Used on 2WD models
*3 : If equipped
11/01/14 19:39:52 31TK4630_610
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side
1
7.5 A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
20 A
Circuits Protected
Blind Spot Information
System*
SH-AWD*
Washer
Wiper
ODS
ABS/VSA
Not Used
Starter Relay
Fuel Pump
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
28
29
30
31
32
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
* : If equipped
Circuits Protected
VB SOL
SRS
Meter
ACG
Not Used
Daytime Running Lights
A/C
Accessory, Key, Lock*
Accessory
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Moonroof
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Rear Left Power Window
Front ACC Socket
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Side Door Lock
Front Left Fog Light
Left Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Left Headlight High Beam
TPMS
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
STS*
CONTINUED
605
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
No. Amps.
11/01/14 19:40:01 31TK4630_611
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s side
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
1
2
10 A
10 A
3
4
5
6
10 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Right Front Fog Light
Right Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Interior Lights
No. Amps.
7
8
−
20 A
9
20 A
10
11
10 A
20 A
12
13
10 A
20 A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
−
20 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
20 A
−
−
−
* : If equipped
606
2012 TL
Circuits Protected
Not Used
Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining
Passenger’s Power Seat
Sliding
Right Side Door Lock
Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window
Keyless Access System*
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Not Used
Premium amplifier
Console ACC Socket
Not Used
Lumbar Support
Seat Heaters
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
11/01/14 19:40:14 31TK4630_612
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
On SH-AWD models
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Except SH-AWD models
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
Start the engine.
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Shift to the D position and hold for
5 seconds, then to N.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground. This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.
*
Release the parking brake.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button instead
of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is
the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more
information, see pages 184 and 187.
CONTINUED
607
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.
Turn off the engine.
11/01/14 19:40:23 31TK4630_613
Emergency Towing
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch* in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
*: Models equipped with the keyless access
system have an engine start/stop button instead
of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is
the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode
is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information,
see pages 184 and 187.
608
2012 TL
On models with the Keyless Access
system, the ENGINE START/STOP
BUTTON indicator will conf irm that
the power mode is in the ACCESSORY
mode and that the steering lock is
released. If the steering wheel does not
turn f reely, rotate the wheel right and
lef t while pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON. This
inf ormation also appears on the multiinf ormation display (see page 189 ).
11/01/14 19:40:39 31TK4630_614
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
On models with keyless access system
When you need to release the
steering lock while your vehicle’s
battery is dead, do this:
1. Follow the proper jump starting
procedures, Step 1 through Step 5,
to apply the power to your vehicle
(see pages 591 and 592 ).
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button to set the power mode to
ACCESSORY (see page 184 ) and
verify the steering lock is released.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page 607 ).
If you slip the clutch for a long time
while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage the
transmission. Use a tow service to
prevent transmission damage.
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
To use the towing hook:
2. Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the spare tire (see
page 584 ).
Failure to comply means the steering
lock may be damaged.
CONTINUED
609
2012 TL
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Remove the cover from the front
bumper using your fingers, or pry
it off using a cloth and a flat-tip
screwdriver to prevent scratches.
3. Follow the jump starting
procedures, Step 8 and Step 9, and
the instructions to disconnect the
jumper cable (see page 592 ). The
steering will remain unlocked even
if the battery is dead.
11/01/14 19:40:44 31TK4630_615
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
610
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:40:49 31TK4630_616
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 612
Specifications ................................. 614
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 617
Tire Labeling .................................. 619
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 621
Emissions Controls........................ 623
Three Way Catalytic
Converters .................................. 625
Emissions Testing ......................... 626
Technical Information
611
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:40:54 31TK4630_617
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
Technical Information
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
612
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:40:59 31TK4630_618
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on the side of the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
613
2012 TL
Technical Information
ENGINE NUMBER
11/01/17 13:16:16 31TK4630_619
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Technical Information
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Capacities
Fuel tank
194.0 in (4,928 mm)
74.0 in (1,880 mm)
57.2 in (1,452 mm)
109.3 in (2,775 mm)
63.2 in (1,605.5 mm)
63.8 in (1,620 mm)
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
5
2
3
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.8−19.6 oz (505−555 g)
ND-OIL8
*1
Approx.
18.5 US gal (70 )
1.66 US gal (6.3 )
2.19 US gal (8.3 )
Change
Total
Change*2
Including filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Without filter
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Total
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Automatic
Change
transmission
2WD
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
fluid
SH-AWD
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Total
2WD
7.5 US qt (7.1 )
SH-AWD
8.5 US qt (8.0 )
Manual
Change
2.2 US qt (2.1 )
transmission Total
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
fluid
Rear
Change
2.67 US qt (2.53 )
differential
Total
2.93 US qt (2.77 )
fluid (SH-AWD)
Transfer
Change
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
assembly
Total
0.48 US qt (0.45 )
fluid (SH-AWD)
Windshield
U.S. Vehicle
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer
Canada Vehicle
6.1 US qt (5.8 )
reservoir
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.182 US gal (0.69 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
614
2012 TL
11/01/17 13:16:36 31TK4630_620
Specifications
Lights
Headlight (Low beam*1)
Headlight (High beam/DRL)
Front turn signal/parking
lights
Front side marker lights
Front fog lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Rear side marker lights
Stop/taillights
Side turn signal lights
High-mount brake light
License plate lights
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Console compartment light
Glove box Light
Foot light
Engine (2WD)
Type
35 W (D2S)
60 W (HB3)
28/8 W (Amber)
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
3 CP
55 W (H11)
21 W (Amber)
16 W
3 CP
LED*2
LED*2
LED*2
3 CP
5W
3.4 W
1.4 W
1.4 W
1.4 W
LED*2
Engine (SH-AWD)
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Passenger’s side
*2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
Battery
Capacity
Driver’s side
Under-hood
12 V − 55 AH/5 HR
12 V − 65 AH/20 HR
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)
223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )
11.2 : 1
NGK:
ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S
See pages 605 or the fuse label
attached on the under panel.
See pages 606 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door.
See page 604 or the fuse box
cover.
CONTINUED
615
2012 TL
Technical Information
*1 : On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beam headlights,
replacement of a bulb should be performed by your dealer.
Fuses
Interior
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
11.2 : 1
DILZKR7A11G
NGK:
11/01/14 19:41:49 31TK4630_621
Specifications
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Pressure
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
P245/50R17 98V *1, *2
P245/45R18 96V *3, *4, *5
P245/40R19 94V *6
T135/80D17 103M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )**1,5 *2, *3, *4,
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )*6
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )**1,5 *2, *3, *4,
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )*6
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
*1 : TL
*2 : TL with Technology Package
*3 : TL with Advance Package and Canadian Elite Package
*4 : SH-AWD
*5 : SH-AWD with Technology Package
*6 : SH-AWD with Advance Package and Canadian SH-AWD Elite
Package
Technical Information
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
−0.5°
−1°
3.8°
616
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:42:00 31TK4630_622
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Technical Information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
617
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:42:05 31TK4630_623
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade
for this tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
618
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:42:19 31TK4630_624
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
(1)
98 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
V
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
P245/50R17 98V
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
245 − Tire width in millimeters.
50 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
(4)
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
(1)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
17 − Rim diameter in inches.
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
CONTINUED
619
2012 TL
Technical Information
R
11/01/14 19:42:34 31TK4630_625
Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT −This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R −Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Technical Information
FW6X −Tire type code.
2202
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating − Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
−Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
620
2012 TL
Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.
11/01/14 19:42:43 31TK4630_626
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
621
2012 TL
Technical Information
CONTINUED
11/01/14 19:42:49 31TK4630_627
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Technical Information
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
622
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:42:59 31TK4630_628
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
*
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the
Canadian emission requirements, as specified in
an agreement with Environment Canada, at the
time they are manufactured.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
623
2012 TL
Technical Information
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
11/01/14 19:43:13 31TK4630_629
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System
Technical Information
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel
is burned.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
624
2012 TL
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work
together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Acura replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems
are covered by warranties separate
from the rest of your vehicle. Read
your warranty manual for more
information.
11/01/14 19:43:22 31TK4630_630
Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are referred
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Acura parts or their equivalent.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
Defective three way catalytic
converters contribute to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s
performance. Follow these
guidelines to protect your vehicle’s
three way catalytic converters.
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. They can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near them. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converters
ineffective.
625
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:43:33 31TK4630_631
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain
‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set
in the on- board diagnostics for the
emissions systems. These codes
are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only
after several days of driving under a
variety of conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank
is nearly, but not completely, full
(around 3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Technical Information
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
626
2012 TL
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic) or neutral (manual).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm, and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
11/01/14 19:43:39 31TK4630_632
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
not use the cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Technical Information
627
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:43:41 31TK4630_633
628
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:43:44 31TK4630_634
Warranty and Client Relations
Client Service Information ........... 630
Warranty Coverages ..................... 631
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 632
Authorized Manuals ...................... 633
Warranty and Client Relations
629
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:43:54 31TK4630_635
Client Service Information
Warranty and Client Relations
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Canadian Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Acura Client
Relations
In Puerto Rico
and the U. S. Virgin Islands:
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Relations
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Honda Canada Inc.
Acura Client Services
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-Mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Tel: (800) 382-2238
630
2012 TL
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 612 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
11/01/14 19:44:08 31TK4630_636
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new Acura is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Acura accessories are covered under
this warranty. Time and mileage
limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Acura
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2012 Acura Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2012 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
631
2012 TL
Warranty and Client Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the emissions control systems and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
11/01/14 19:44:16 31TK4630_637
Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty and Client Relations
In the US
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
inform Transport Canada.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
become involved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.saf ercar.gov ;
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
information on reporting safety defects or about motor
vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
632
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:44:29 31TK4630_638
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www.helminc.com
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
31TK4630
31TK4820
31TK4M30
31TK4Q30
ACU-R
Form Description
2009-2012 Acura TL Service Manual
2012 Acura TL Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2009-2011 Model Series Acura TL
Body Repair Manual
2012 Acura TL Owner’s Manual
2012 Acura TL Navigation Manual
2012 Acura TL Maintenance Journal
2012 Acura TL Advanced Technology Guide
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
633
2012 TL
Authorized Manuals
Publication
Form Number
61TK403
61TK403EL
61TK4300
11/01/17 13:16:41 31TK4630_640
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
AAC ................................. 273, 313, 365
Accessories..................................... 479
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ...................................... 151
ACCESSORY Mode
(Power Mode) .................... 184, 185
Accessory Power Sockets............. 215
Active Head Restraints ................. 165
AcuraLink ..................................... 449
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 544
Advanced Airbags............................ 28
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 24
Airbag System Components ........... 24
Air Conditioning System....... 226, 227
Usage .......................................... 228
Air Pressure, Tires ................ 568, 570
Antifreeze ....................................... 546
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 66, 508
Operation .................................... 508
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 390
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock..................................... 151, 189
Audio System ................................. 235
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .. 141
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22
Automatic Speed Control.............. 401
Automatic Transmission............... 494
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 614
Checking Fluid Level ................ 549
Paddle Shifters ........................... 499
Shifting ........................................ 495
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 494
Shift Lock Release ..................... 497
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 389
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 65, 596
Jump Starting ............................. 591
Maintenance ............................... 577
Management System .................. 87
Specifications ............................. 615
Before Driving ............................... 467
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 20
Beverage Holders .......................... 214
I
2012 TL
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Blind Spot Information System
(BSI) ............................................ 519
Bluetooth Audio .................... 281, 376
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink ................ 407, 424
Booster Seats ................................... 54
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 508
Break-in, New Linings .............. 468
Fluid ............................................ 553
Parking ........................................ 212
System Indicator .................. 65, 598
Wear Indicators ......................... 507
Braking System.............................. 507
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 468
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 143
Built-In Key..................................... 201
11/01/14 19:44:44 31TK4630_641
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 562
Daytime Running Lights .......... 555
Fog Lights .................................. 560
Headlights .................................. 555
Specifications ............................. 615
Turn Signal Lights ............. 558, 562
Bulbs, Halogen ....................... 555, 560
C
Capacities Chart............................. 614
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Carrying, Cargo ............................. 481
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 381
CD Changer.................................... 253
CD Player........................................ 307
Certification Label ......................... 612
Chains ............................................. 575
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 583
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 544
When to....................................... 531
Charging System Indicator .... 65, 596
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 486
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Child Safety ...................................... 37
Booster Seats ............................... 54
Child Seats .................................... 45
Infants ........................................... 42
Large Children ............................. 53
LATCH.......................................... 47
Risks with Airbags....................... 38
Small Children.............................. 43
Tethers.......................................... 51
Warning Labels ...................... 39, 59
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 38
Child Seats ........................................ 45
LATCH.......................................... 47
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Childproof Door Locks ................. 153
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 564
Client Service Information ........... 630
Climate Control System ........ 226, 227
On/Off Button ........................... 229
Clock ............................................... 391
Clutch Fluid .................................... 554
CO in the Exhaust ................... 57, 623
Cold Weather, Starting in ..... 487, 489
Compact Spare Tire....................... 582
Compass.......................................... 397
Console Compartment .................. 216
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Consumer Information.................. 630
Controls, Instruments and .............. 61
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 546
Checking ..................................... 475
Proper Solution .......................... 546
Temperature Gauge .................... 77
Water Temp Hot Message ......... 77
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 623
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 72
Cruise Control Operation ............. 401
Cup Holders.................................... 214
Customer Service Office .............. 630
Customized Settings.........................94
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 62
Daytime Running Lights............... 142
Dead Battery .................................. 591
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 632
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 145
Defrosting the Windows ............... 231
Dimensions ..................................... 614
II
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:44:51 31TK4630_642
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Dimming the Headlights .............. 139
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 549
Engine Oil ................................... 474
Directional Signals......................... 139
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 507
Disc Changer.................................. 253
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 263
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 546
Doors
Lock Button, Outer Handle ...... 176
Lockout Prevention ........... 153, 177
Monitor Indicator .................. 12, 71
Power Door Locks ..................... 152
Unlock Sensor, Outer Handle .. 175
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ......... 617
Downshifting,
Manual Transmission ............... 491
D-Paddle Shift Mode ..................... 499
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 485
Economy ..................................... 476
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 170
Dual Temperature and Mode
Control ........................................ 232
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 566
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 476
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) System ............................. 510
Emergencies................................... 581
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 591
Brake System Indicator ............ 598
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 583
Charging System Indicator ...... 596
Checking the Fuses................... 600
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 145
If the Engine Won’t Start .......... 588
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ....... 609
Jump Starting ............................. 591
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 595
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 597
Manually Opening Fuel Fill
Door ........................................ 599
Overheated Engine ................... 593
Towing ........................................ 607
Emergency Brake .......................... 212
Emergency Engine Start............... 490
Emergency Flashers ..................... 145
* : U. S .
III
2012 TL
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Emergency Towing ....................... 607
Emergency Trunk Opener ........... 156
Emissions Controls........................ 623
Emissions Testing ......................... 626
Engine
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 546
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 77
If It Won’t Start .......................... 588
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 64, 597
Oil Life .................................. 85, 531
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 64, 595
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 543
Overheating................................ 593
Specifications ............................. 615
Speed Limiter ..................... 492, 497
Start/Stop Button .............. 183, 188
Starting ............................... 487, 489
Starting System
Message.......................... 488, 490
Engine Compartment Covers....... 542
Engine Coolant ............................... 546
Engine Start/Stop Button ..... 183, 188
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 469
11/01/14 19:44:57 31TK4630_643
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 623
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 57
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 18
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 230
Features .......................................... 225
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 470
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 566
Oil ................................................ 544
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 145
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 583
Floor Mats ...................................... 565
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 549
Brake ........................................... 553
Clutch .......................................... 554
Manual Transmission ............... 551
Windshield Washers ................. 548
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 385
Fog Lights ...................................... 143
Four-way Flashers ......................... 145
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 26
Front Seats ..................................... 161
Adjusting..................................... 161
Airbags ...................................... 9, 26
Heaters ............................... 202, 204
Ventilation .................................. 204
Fuel .................................................. 468
Fill Door and Cap....................... 470
Gauge ............................................ 76
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 73
Octane Requirement ................. 468
Oxygenated ................................ 469
Tank, Filling the......................... 470
Fuel Economy ................................ 476
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 600
G
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 77
Fuel ................................................ 76
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 494
Manual Transmission ............... 491
Glove Box ....................................... 216
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) .............................. 483, 614
H
Halogen Bulbs ........................ 555, 560
HandsFreeLink (HFL) ....... 407, 424
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 145
Hard Disc Drive (HDD),
Playing......................................... 320
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 476
Gasoline .......................................... 468
Gauge ............................................ 76
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 73
Octane Requirement ................. 468
Tank, Refueling ......................... 470
Gas Station Procedures................. 470
IV
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:45:04 31TK4630_644
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Headlights ...................................... 139
Aiming ......................................... 555
Automatic Lighting Off ............. 141
Automatic Lighting On ............. 140
Daytime Running Lights .......... 142
High Beam Indicator ................... 71
Reminder Beeps ........................ 139
Replacing Bulbs ......................... 555
Turning on .................................. 139
Washers ...................................... 138
Head Restraints ............................. 162
Heated Mirrors .............................. 169
Heater, Seat ............................ 202, 204
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 140
Hill Start Assist .............................. 512
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 404
Hood, Opening and Closing ......... 472
Horn ............................................ 4, 136
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 554
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 612
Ignition
Keys............................................. 147
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Switch .......................................... 151
Timing Control System ............. 624
Immobilizer System....................... 149
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators/Messages ................ 64, 90
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)....... 66, 508
Battery Charge Low .................... 87
Blind Spot Information
System (BSI) .................... 75, 521
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 65, 598
Charging System ................. 65, 596
Cruise Control .............................. 72
Door Open .............................. 12, 71
Fog Lights .................................... 71
High Beam .................................... 71
Hot Coolant .................................. 77
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 65
Keyless Access System............... 74
Lights On ...................................... 71
Low Fuel ....................................... 73
Low Oil Pressure ................. 64, 595
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS.......... 69
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 597
Seat Belt .................................. 20, 64
Side Airbag Off ...................... 33, 67
V
2012 TL
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
SRS .......................................... 32, 67
Starting System.................. 488, 490
Trunk Open ............................ 12, 71
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 70
VSA Off ......................................... 68
VSA System .................................. 68
Individual Map Lights ................... 221
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 64
Infant Restraint ................................ 42
Infant Seats ....................................... 42
LATCH.......................................... 47
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 568
Inside Mirror .................................. 167
Inspection, Tire .............................. 571
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Using LATCH .............................. 47
Instrument Panel ............................. 63
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 143
Interior Lights ................................ 220
Introduction ......................................... i
11/01/17 13:18:44 31TK4630_645
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 584
Jack, Tire ........................................ 584
Jump Starting ................................. 591
K
Keyless Access Remote ........ 174, 179
Keyless Access Remote System
Main Switch ................................ 195
Keyless Access System................. 173
Keys ................................................. 147
Built-In......................................... 201
L
Label, Certification ........................ 612
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 139
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 16, 21
LATCH System ................................ 47
Lights Control Buttons ................. 220
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 555
Indicator ........................................ 63
Parking ........................................ 139
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Turn Signal ........................... 70, 139
Load Limits..................................... 482
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 151
LOCK VEHICLE OFF
(Power Mode) .................... 184, 185
Lockout Prevention ............... 153, 177
Locks
Anti-theft Steering
Column............................ 151, 189
Childproof Door ......................... 153
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 470
Glove Box ................................... 216
Power Door ................................ 152
Trunk .......................................... 154
Trunk Pass-through Cover ....... 166
Low Coolant Level ......................... 475
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 73
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 64, 595
Lower Anchors................................. 47
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 614
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 481
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
M
Maintenance ................................... 529
Main Items and Sub
Items ............................... 536, 540
Minder......................................... 531
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 539
Safety........................................... 530
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ..................................... 64, 597
Manual Transmission.................... 491
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 551
Map Lights ..................................... 221
Memory, Driving Position ............ 170
Meters, Gauges.......................... 63, 76
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 167
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 480
Moonroof ........................................ 210
Multi-Information Display .............. 78
Music by Voice............................... 334
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 496
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 468
VI
2012 TL
11/01/17 13:18:49 31TK4630_646
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Normal Shift Speeds ............. 492, 503
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 612
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 468
Odometer .......................................... 82
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 544
Change, When to ....................... 531
Checking Engine ....................... 474
Pressure Indicator ............... 64, 595
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ............................... 543, 544
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 151
ON Mode (Power Mode) ..... 184, 185
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 623
Operating Range ............................ 174
Outside Mirrors ............................. 168
Outside Temperature ...................... 85
Overheating, Engine ..................... 593
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 539
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 469
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
P
Paddle Shifters ............................... 499
Panel Brightness Control ............. 143
Park Gear Position......................... 495
Parking ............................................ 506
Parking Brake ................................ 212
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 65, 598
Parking Lights................................ 139
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 506
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 34
PGM-FI System.............................. 624
Phonetic Modification ................... 335
Pollen Filter .................................... 566
Power Mode ................................... 184
ACCESSORY Mode .................. 185
ON Mode .................................... 185
START Mode ..................... 187, 188
VEHICLE OFF Mode ............... 185
Power Socket Locations................ 213
Power Windows ............................. 206
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
VII
2012 TL
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Protecting Children ......................... 37
General Guidelines ...................... 37
Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Protecting Larger Children ........ 53
Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 51
Using LATCH .............................. 47
Protecting Your Discs ................... 381
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 593
Radio/Disc Sound System.... 236, 285
Radio Theft Protection.................. 390
Radio, XM ............................. 246, 299
Readiness Codes .................... 597, 626
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 562
Rear Seat Armrest ......................... 166
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 465
Rearview Mirror ............................ 167
Rear Window Defogger ................ 145
Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 161
11/01/14 19:45:24 31TK4630_647
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Recommended Shift
Speeds ................................. 492, 503
Refueling ......................................... 470
Reminder Indicators ........................ 64
Remote, Keyless Access
System................................. 174, 179
Remote Audio Controls................. 387
Remote Transmitter ...................... 157
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 566
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 544
Fuses ........................................... 600
Light Bulbs ................................. 555
Minder......................................... 531
Timing Belt ................................. 554
Tires ............................................ 573
Wiper Blades .............................. 566
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 23
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 632
Reserve Tank, Engine
Coolant ................................ 475, 546
Reverse Tilt Mirror ....................... 168
Restraint, Child ................................ 37
Reverse Gear Position................... 496
Rotation, Tire ................................. 573
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 20
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 632
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 58
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 20
Additional Information ................ 20
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 22
Cleaning ...................................... 564
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Maintenance ................................. 23
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ................................. 20, 64
System Components.................... 20
Use During Pregnancy................ 18
Seat Heaters ........................... 202, 204
Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 161
Seat Ventilation .............................. 204
Security System ............................. 395
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Selector Knob (Disc Changer) .... 236
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Sequential Shift Mode ................... 501
Serial Number ................................ 612
Service Minder ............................... 531
Service Manual* ............................ 633
Service Station Procedures .......... 470
Setting the Clock ........................... 391
SH-AWD Indicator......................... 73
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 494
Shift Lock Release ......................... 497
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 30
Side Airbag Off Indicator ......... 33, 67
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 32
Signaling Turns .............................. 139
Snow Tires ...................................... 575
Sound System ................................. 235
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 582
Specifications ..................... 582, 616
Spark Plugs ..................................... 615
Specifications ................................. 614
Speed Control ................................. 401
Speedometer .................................... 76
* : U. S
VIII
2012 TL
11/01/17 13:18:54 31TK4630_648
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS, Additional Information........... 24
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Airbag Service .............................. 35
Airbag System Components ....... 24
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 33
How the SRS Indicator
Works ........................................ 32
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 32
SRS Indicator.............................. 32, 67
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 151
START Mode
(Power Mode) .................... 184, 185
Start/Stop Button, Engine .... 183, 188
Starting the Engine ............... 487, 489
Check Starting System ..... 488, 490
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ........................... 487, 489
With a Dead Battery ................. 591
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 593
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Steering Wheel
Adjustments ............................... 146
Anti-theft Column Lock .... 151, 189
Steering Wheel
Buttons ............... 387, 401, 407, 424
Stereo Sound System .................... 235
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 578
Sun Visors ....................................... 217
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 218
Super Handling All-Wheel
Drive (TM) (SH-AWD ) .... 73, 504
Supplemental Restraint System ..... 24
Servicing ....................................... 35
SRS Indicator................................ 32
System Components.................... 24
Synthetic Oil ................................... 544
T
Tachometer ...................................... 76
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 581
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 617
Emissions Control Systems ...... 623
Three Way Catalytic
Converter........................ 624, 625
* : U. S
IX
2012 TL
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Temperature Gauge ........................ 77
Temperature, Outside ..................... 85
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 234
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51
Theft Protection, Radio................. 390
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 625
Tighten Fuel Cap Message .......... 471
Tilt the Steering Wheel................. 146
Time, Setting the ........................... 391
Tire Chains ..................................... 575
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 583
Tire Information ............................ 617
Tire Labeling .................................. 619
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ..................... 514
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator............................ 69, 514
Pressure Monitor....................... 515
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 621
TPMS System Failure ............... 517
11/01/17 13:18:59 31TK4630_649
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Tires ................................................ 568
Air Pressure ....................... 568, 570
Chains ......................................... 575
Checking Wear .......................... 571
Compact Spare ........................... 582
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 617
Glossary of Tire Terminology.. 620
Inflation ....................................... 568
Inspection ................................... 571
Replacing .................................... 573
Rotating....................................... 573
Service Life ................................. 572
Snow ............................................ 575
Specifications ..................... 574, 616
Traction Devices........................ 575
Winter Driving ........................... 575
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 584
Torque Distribution Monitor
(SH-AWD ) ................................ 504
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 528
Emergency Wrecker ................. 607
Hook ............................................ 609
Traction Devices ............................ 575
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 549
Checking Fluid Level,
Manual .................................... 551
Fluid Selection ................... 550, 551
Identification Number............... 613
Shifting the Automatic .............. 495
Shifting the Manual ................... 491
Treadwear ...................................... 617
Trip Computer ................................. 83
Trip Meter ........................................ 83
Trunk............................................... 154
Emergency Opener ................... 156
Opening the ................................ 154
Open Indicator ............................. 71
Open Monitor Indicator .............. 12
Turn Signals ................................... 139
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 581
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 617
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 468
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
USB Adapter
Cable ................... 266, 275, 356, 367
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 546
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 217
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 482
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 614
VEHICLE OFF Mode
(Power Mode) .................... 184, 185
Vehicle Identification Number..... 612
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ..... 510
VSA Off Indicator ................ 68, 510
VSA OFF Switch ........................ 511
VSA System Indicator ......... 68, 510
Vehicle Storage .............................. 578
VIN .................................................. 612
Viscosity, Oil .......................... 543, 544
Voice Control System............ 228, 285
W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
X
2012 TL
11/01/14 19:45:42 31TK4630_650
INDEX A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 58
Warranty Coverages ..................... 631
Washer, Windshield
Fluid Level Message ................. 548
Operation .................................... 137
Reserve Tank ............................. 548
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 146
Alignment and Balance ............. 573
Compact Spare ........................... 582
Wrench, Nut ............................... 584
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 207
Operating the Power ................. 206
Rear, Defogger .......................... 145
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 137
Defroster .................................... 231
Washers ...................................... 137
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 566
Operation .................................... 137
Worn Tires ..................................... 571
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 607
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
X
XM Radio .............................. 246, 299
XI
2012 TL
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
11/01/17 18:34:20 31TK4630_653
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher required (see ‘‘Fuel
Recommendations’’ on page 468 ).
Fuel Tank Capacity:
18.5 US gal (70 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
2WD models
API Premium grade 0W-20
detergent oil (see page 543 ).
SH-AWD models
Rear Differential Fluid:
Use Acura All-Wheel Drive Fluid
(DPSF) only.
Capacity:
SH-AWD differential case
2.67 US qt (2.53 )
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
All models
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Acura Manual Transmission Fluid
preferred, or an SAE 0W-20 or
5W-20 motor oil as a temporary
replacement (see page 552 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Capacity:
2.2 US qt (2.1 )
SH-AWD models
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 544 ).
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission fluid) (see page 550 ).
2012 TL
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 553 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
All models except SH-AWD with
Advance Package and Canadian
SH-AWD Elite Package
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
SH-AWD with Advance Package
and Canadian SH-AWD Elite
Package
Front/Rear:
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
11/01/14 17:53:06 31TK4630_001
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Acura TL. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
Images throughout this owner’s manual
(including the front cover) represent
features and equipment that are available on
some, but not all, models. Your particular
model may not have some of these features.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
2012 TL
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33TK4C30.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising